48TCA04---A12
Nominal 3 to 10 Tons
With Puron® (R---410A) Refrigerant
Service and Maintenance Instructions
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
UNIT ARRANGEMENT AND ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PURONR (R-410A) REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SMOKE DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
GAS HEATING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PREMIERLINKT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
RTU-MP CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ECONOMI$ER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
WIRING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
START-UP, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
START-UP, PREMIERLINKT CONTROL . . . . . . . . 68
START-UP, RTU-MP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
OPERATING SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE . 82
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 87
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
APPENDIX V. WIRING DIAGRAM LIST . . . . . . . . 104
Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment
can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical
components. Only trained and qualified service personnel
should install, repair, or service air-conditioning
equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic
maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service
personnel should perform all other operations.
When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe
precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to
the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply.
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work
gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations.
Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing
operations.
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work
gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have
fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions
thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to
the unit. Consult local building codes and National
Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements.
Recognize safety information. This is the safety-alert
symbol
. When you see this symbol on the unit and in
instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for
personal injury.
Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and
CAUTION. These words are used with the safety-alert
symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards
which will result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING signifies a hazard which could result in
personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify
unsafe practices which may result in minor personal
injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to
highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced
installation, reliability, or operation.
APPENDIX VI. MOTORMASTER SENSOR
LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quarterly Inspection (and 30 days after initial start)
S Return air filter replacement
To remove the filters:
1. Grasp the bottom flange of the upper panel.
S Outdoor hood inlet filters cleaned
S Belt tension checked
2. Lift up and swing the bottom out until the panel dis-
engages and pulls out.
3. Reach inside and extract the filters from the filter
rack.
4. Replace these filters as required with similar replace-
ment filters of same size.
S Belt condition checked
S Pulley alignment checked
S Fan shaft bearing locking collar tightness checked
S Condenser coil cleanliness checked
S Condensate drain checked
To re-install the access panel:
1. Slide the top of the panel up under the unit top panel.
2. Slide the bottom into the side channels.
Seasonal Maintenance
These items should be checked at the beginning of each
season (or more often if local conditions and usage
patterns dictate):
3. Push the bottom flange down until it contacts the top
of the lower panel (or economizer top).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT
WITHOUT THESE FILTERS!
Air Conditioning
Outside Air Hood
S Condenser fan motor mounting bolts tightness
S Compressor mounting bolts
S Condenser fan blade positioning
S Control box cleanliness and wiring condition
S Wire terminal tightness
Outside air hood inlet screens are permanent
aluminum-mesh type filters. Check these for cleanliness.
Remove the screens when cleaning is required. Clean by
washing with hot low-pressure water and soft detergent
and replace all screens before restarting the unit. Observe
the flow direction arrows on the side of each filter frame.
S Refrigerant charge level
S Evaporator coil cleaning
Economizer Inlet Air Screen
S Evaporator blower motor amperage
Heating
This air screen is retained by spring clips under the top
edge of the hood. (See Fig. 3.)
S Heat exchanger flue passageways cleanliness
S Gas burner condition
17 1/4”
S Gas manifold pressure
S Heating temperature rise
Economizer or Outside Air Damper
S Inlet filters condition
DIVIDER
S Check damper travel (economizer)
S Check gear and dampers for debris and dirt
Air Filters and Screens
OUTSIDE
AIR
HOOD
Each unit is equipped with return air filters. If the unit has
an economizer, it will also have an outside air screen. If a
manual outside air damper is added, an inlet air screen
will also be present.
CLEANABLE
ALUMINUM
FILTER
FILTER
BAROMETRIC
RELIEF
Each of these filters and screens will need to be
periodically replaced or cleaned.
FILTER
CLIP
C06027
Return Air Filters
Fig. 3 - Filter Installation
Return air filters are disposable fiberglass media type.
Access to the filters is through the small lift-out panel
located on the rear side of the unit, above the
evaporator/return air access panel. (See Fig. 1.)
To remove the filter, open the spring clips. Re-install the
filter by placing the frame in its track, then closing the
spring clips.
Manual Outside Air Hood Screen
This inlet screen is secured by a retainer angle across the
top edge of the hood. (See Fig. 4.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
inside surfaces. Check belt tension by using a spring-force
tool (such as Browning’s Part Number “Belt Tension
Checker” or equivalent tool); tension should be 6-lbs at a
5/8-in. deflection when measured at the centerline of the
belt span. This point is at the center of the belt when
measuring the distance between the motor shaft and the
blower shaft.
NOTE: Without the spring-tension tool, place a straight
edge across the belt surface at the pulleys, then deflect the
belt at mid-span using one finger to a 1/2-in. deflection.
Adjust belt tension by loosening the motor mounting plate
front bolts and rear bolt and sliding the plate toward the
fan (to reduce tension) or away from fan (to increase
tension). Ensure the blower shaft and the motor shaft are
parallel to each other (pulleys aligned). Tighten all bolts
when finished.
C07156
Fig. 4 - Screens Installed on Outdoor-Air Hood
(Sizes 7-1/2 to 12-1/2 Tons Shown)
To remove the screen, loosen the screws in the top retainer
and slip the retainer up until the filter can be removed.
Re-install by placing the frame in its track, rotating the
retainer back down and tighten all screws.
To replace the belt:
1. Use a belt with same section type or similar size. Do
not substitute a “FHP” type belt. When installing the
new belt, do not use a tool (screwdriver or pry-bar) to
force the belt over the pulley flanges, this will stress
the belt and cause a reduction in belt life.
SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION
2. Loosen the motor mounting plate front bolts and rear
bolts.
3. Push the motor and its mounting plate towards the
blower housing as close as possible to reduce the cen-
ter distance between fan shaft and motor shaft.
4. Remove the belt by gently lifting the old belt over
one of the pulleys.
5. Install the new belt by gently sliding the belt over
both pulleys and then sliding the motor and plate
away from the fan housing until proper tension is
achieved.
6. Check the alignment of the pulleys, adjust if neces-
sary.
7. Tighten all bolts.
8. Check the tension after a few hours of runtime and
re-adjust as required.
!
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal
injury or death.
Before performing service or maintenance operations
on the fan system, shut off all unit power and tag-out
the unit disconnect switch. Do not reach into the fan
section with power still applied to unit.
Supply Fan (Belt--Drive)
The supply fan system consists of a forward-curved
centrifugal blower wheel on a solid shaft with two
concentric type bearings, one on each side of the blower
housing. A fixed-pitch driven pulley is attached to the fan
shaft and an adjustable-pitch driver pulley is on the
motor. The pulleys are connected using a “V” type belt.
(See Fig. 5.)
Adjustable-Pitch Pulley on Motor
The motor pulley is an adjustable-pitch type that allows a
servicer to implement changes in the fan wheel speed to
match as-installed ductwork systems. The pulley consists
of a fixed flange side that faces the motor (secured to the
motor shaft) and a movable flange side that can be rotated
around the fixed flange side that increases or reduces the
pitch diameter of this driver pulley. (See Fig. 6.)
As the pitch diameter is changed by adjusting the position
of the movable flange, the centerline on this pulley shifts
laterally (along the motor shaft). This creates
a
requirement for a realignment of the pulleys after any
adjustment of the movable flange. Also reset the belt
tension after each realignment.
C07087
Check the condition of the motor pulley for signs of wear.
Glazing of the belt contact surfaces and erosion on these
surfaces are signs of improper belt tension and/or belt
slippage. Pulley replacement may be necessary.
Fig. 5 - Belt Drive Motor Mounting
Belt
Check the belt condition and tension quarterly. Inspect the
belt for signs of cracking, fraying or glazing along the
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change fan speed:
Motor
1. Shut off unit power supply.
2. Loosen belt by loosening fan motor mounting nuts.
(See Fig. 5.)
When replacing the motor, also replace the external-tooth
lock washer (star washer) under the motor mounting base;
this is part of the motor grounding system. Ensure the
teeth on the lock washer are in contact with the motor’s
painted base. Tighten motor mounting bolts to 120 +/- 12
in-lbs.
3. Loosen movable pulley flange setscrew. (See Fig. 6.)
4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increase
speed and away from fixed flange to decrease speed.
Increasing fan speed increases load on motor. Do not
exceed maximum speed specified.
5. Set movable flange at nearest keyway of pulley hub
and tighten setscrew to torque specifications.
Changing fan wheel speed by changing pulleys: The
horsepower rating of the belt is primarily dictated by the
pitch diameter of the smaller pulley in the drive system
(typically the motor pulley in these units). Do not install a
replacement motor pulley with a smaller pitch diameter
than provided on the original factory pulley. Change fan
wheel speed by changing the fan pulley (larger pitch
diameter to reduce wheel speed, smaller pitch diameter to
increase wheel speed) or select a new system (both
pulleys and matching belt(s)).
To align fan and motor pulleys:
1. Loosen fan pulley setscrews.
2. Slide fan pulley along fan shaft. Make angular align-
ment by loosening motor from mounting.
3. Tighten fan pulley setscrews and motor mounting
bolts to torque specifications.
4. Recheck belt tension.
Before changing pulleys to increase fan wheel speed,
check the fan performance at the target speed and airflow
rate to determine new motor loading (bhp). Use the fan
performance tables or use the Packaged Rooftop Builder
software program. Confirm that the motor in this unit is
capable of operating at the new operating condition. Fan
shaft loading increases dramatically as wheel speed is
increased.
To reduce vibration, replace the motor’s adjustable pitch
pulley with a fixed pitch pulley (after the final airflow
balance adjustment). This will reduce the amount of
vibration generated by the motor/belt-drive system.
COOLING
C07075
!
WARNING
Fig. 6 - Supply-Fan Pulley Adjustment
UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD
Bearings
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal
injury, death and/or equipment damage.
This fan system uses bearings featuring concentric split
locking collars. The collars are tightened through a cap
screw bridging the split portion of the collar. The cap
screw has a Torx T25 socket head. To tighten the locking
collar: Hold the locking collar tightly against the inner
race of the bearing and torque the cap screw to 65-70
in-lb (7.4-7.9 Nm). See Fig. 7.
This system uses PuronR refrigerant which has
higher pressures than R-22 and other refrigerants. No
other refrigerant may be used in this system. Gauge
set, hoses, and recovery system must be designed to
handle Puron refrigerant. If unsure about equipment,
consult the equipment manufacturer.
Condenser Coil
The condenser coil is fabricated with round tube copper
hairpins and plate fins of various materials and/or coatings
(see Model Number Format in the Appendix to identify
the materials provided in this unit). The coil may be
one-row or composite-type two-row. Composite two-row
coils are two single-row coils fabricated with a single
return bend end tubesheet.
Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendation
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination
and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the
C08121
Fig. 7 - Tightening Locking Collar
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The
following maintenance and cleaning procedures are
recommended as part of the routine maintenance activities
to extend the life of the coil.
Two-Row Coils
Clean coil as follows:
1. Turn off unit power, tag disconnect.
2. Remove top panel screws on condenser end of unit.
Remove Surface Loaded Fibers
3. Remove condenser coil corner post. See Fig. 8. To
hold top panel open, place coil corner post between
top panel and center post. See Fig. 9.
Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a
vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a
soft non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either
case, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins.
Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can be
easily bent over and damage to the coating of a protected
coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.
NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose,
against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt
into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more
difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely
removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse.
Periodic Clean Water Rinse
A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils
that are applied in coastal or industrial environments.
However, it is very important that the water rinse is made
with a very low velocity water stream to avoid damaging
the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below is
recommended.
C08205
Fig. 8 - Cleaning Condenser Coil
Routine Cleaning of Coil Surfaces
Periodic cleaning with TotalineR environmentally sound
coil cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This
cleaner is available from Carrier Replacement
Components Division as part number P902-0301 for a one
gallon container, and part number P902-0305 for a 5
gallon container. It is recommended that all coils,
including standard aluminum, pre-coated, copper/copper
or E-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline
environmentally sound coil cleaner as described below.
Coil cleaning should be part of the unit’s regularly
scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of
the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced
durability in the environment.
C08206
Fig. 9 - Propping Up Top Panel
4. Remove screws securing coil to compressor plate and
compressor access panel.
5. Remove fastener holding coil sections together at re-
turn end of condenser coil. Carefully separate the out-
er coil section 3 to 4 in. from the inner coil section.
See Fig. 10.
Avoid use of:
S coil brighteners
S acid cleaning prior to painting
S high pressure washers
S poor quality water for cleaning
Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner is
nonflammable, hypo allergenic, non bacterial, and a
USDA accepted biodegradable agent that will not harm
the coil or surrounding components such as electrical
wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use of
non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged
since coil and unit durability could be affected.
One-Row Coil
Wash coil with commercial coil cleaner. It is not
necessary to remove top panel.
C08207
Fig. 10 - Separating Coil Sections
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Use a water hose or other suitable equipment to flush
down between the 2 coil sections to remove dirt and
debris. Clean the outer surfaces with a stiff brush in
the normal manner.
Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize po-
tential for fin damage.
7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned
areas.
7. Secure inner and outer coil rows together with a
field-supplied fastener.
8. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly
cleaned.
8. Reposition the outer coil section and remove the coil
corner post from between the top panel and center
post. Reinstall the coil corner post and replace all
screws.
9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning
solution for 10 minutes.
10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing.
Reapplying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute
saturation is achieved.
11. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean
water using downward rinsing motion of water spray
nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray
nozzle.
Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner
Application Equipment
S 2-1/2 gallon garden sprayer
S Water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle
Evaporator Coil
!
CAUTION
Cleaning the Evaporator Coil
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
1. Turn unit power off. Install lockout tag. Remove
evaporator coil access panel.
2. If economizer or two-position damper is installed, re-
move economizer by disconnecting Molex plug and
removing mounting screws.
Failure to follow this caution may result in accelerated
corrosion of unit parts.
Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic
cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor
coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult
to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at
the fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are in
contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil,
use the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner.
3. Slide filters out of unit.
4. Clean coil using a commercial coil cleaner or dish-
washer detergent in a pressurized spray canister. Wash
both sides of coil and flush with clean water. For best
results, back-flush toward return-air section to re-
move foreign material. Flush condensate pan after
completion.
!
CAUTION
5. Reinstall economizer and filters.
6. Reconnect wiring.
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in reduced
unit performance or unit shutdown.
7. Replace access panels.
Evaporator Coil Metering Devices
High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden
hose, or compressed air should never be used to
clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will
bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop.
The metering devices are multiple fixed-bore devices
(Acutrolt) swedged into the horizontal outlet tubes from
the liquid header, located at the entrance to each
evaporator coil circuit path. These are non-adjustable.
Service requires replacing the entire liquid header
assembly.
Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner
Application Instructions
To check for possible blockage of one or more of these
metering devices, disconnect the supply fan contactor
(IFC) coil, then start the compressor and observe the
frosting pattern on the face of the evaporator coil. A frost
pattern should develop uniformly across the face of the
coil starting at each horizontal header tube. Failure to
develop frost at an outlet tube can indicate a plugged or a
missing orifice.
1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recom-
mended during mixing and application.
2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacu-
um cleaner as described above.
3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and
a low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend
fins.
4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner in a
2-1/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instruc-
tions included with the cleaner. The optimum solution
temperature is 100_F.
Refrigerant System Pressure Access Ports
There are two access ports in the system - on the suction
tube near the compressor and on the discharge tube near
the compressor. These are brass fittings with black plastic
caps. The hose connection fittings are standard 1/4 SAE
male flare couplings.
NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130_F, as the
enzymatic activity will be destroyed.
5. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally sound
coil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including
finned area, tube sheets and coil headers.
6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and
apply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion.
The brass fittings are two-piece High Flow valves, with a
receptacle base brazed to the tubing and an integral
spring-closed check valve core screwed into the base.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(See Fig. 11.) This check valve is permanently assembled
into this core body and cannot be serviced separately;
replace the entire core body if necessary. Service tools are
available from RCD that allow the replacement of the
check valve core without having to recover the entire
system refrigerant charge. Apply compressor refrigerant
oil to the check valve core’s bottom o-ring. Install the
fitting body with 96 +/ -10 in-lbs of torque; do not
overtighten.
Refrigerant Charge
Amount of refrigerant charge is listed on the unit’s
nameplate. Refer to Carrier GTAC2-5 Charging,
Recovery, Recycling and Reclamation training manual
and the following procedures.
Unit panels must be in place when unit is operating during
the charging procedure.
No Charge
PURONR (R--410A) REFRIGERANT
Use standard evacuating techniques. After evacuating
system, weigh in the specified amount of refrigerant.
This unit is designed for use with Puron (R-410A)
refrigerant. Do not use any other refrigerant in this
system.
Low-Charge Cooling
Using Cooling Charging Charts, Fig. 12, vary refrigerant
until the conditions of the appropriate chart are met. Note
the charging charts are different from type normally used.
Charts are based on charging the units to the correct
superheat for the various operating conditions. Accurate
pressure gauge and temperature sensing device are
required. Connect the pressure gauge to the service port
on the suction line. Mount the temperature sensing device
on the suction line and insulate it so that outdoor ambient
temperature does not affect the reading. Indoor-air cfm
must be within the normal operating range of the unit.
Puron (R-410A) refrigerant is provided in pink (rose)
colored cylinders. These cylinders are available with and
without dip tubes; cylinders with dip tubes will have a
label indicating this feature. For a cylinder with a dip
tube, place the cylinder in the upright position (access
valve at the top) when removing liquid refrigerant for
charging. For a cylinder without a dip tube, invert the
cylinder (access valve on the bottom) when removing
liquid refrigerant.
Because Puron (R-410A) refrigerant is a blend, it is
strongly recommended that refrigerant always be removed
from the cylinder as a liquid. Admit liquid refrigerant into
the system in the discharge line. If adding refrigerant into
the suction line, use a commercial metering/expansion
device at the gauge manifold; remove liquid from the
cylinder, pass it through the metering device at the gauge
set and then pass it into the suction line as a vapor. Do not
remove Puron (R-410A) refrigerant from the cylinder as a
vapor.
To Use Cooling Charging Charts
Take the outdoor ambient temperature and read the
suction pressure gauge. Refer to chart to determine what
suction temperature should be. If suction temperature is
high, add refrigerant. If suction temperature is low,
carefully recover some of the charge. Recheck the suction
pressure as charge is adjusted.
SEAT
CORE
(Part No. EC39EZ067)
1/2-20 UNF RH
0.596
45o
30o
WASHER
O-RING
DEPRESSOR PER ARI 720
+.01/-.035
FROM FACE OF BODY
1/2" HEX
.47
5/8” HEX
7/16-20 UNF RH
This surface provides a metal to metal seal when
torqued into the seat. Appropriate handling is
required to not scratch or dent the surface.
C08453
Fig. 11 - CoreMax Access Port Assembly
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOMINAL TONS
REFERENCE
SIZE DESIGNATION
EXAMPLE:
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A12
3
4
5
Model 48TC*A04
Outdoor Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85_F (29_C)
Suction Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 psig (965 kPa)
Suction Temperature should be . . . . . . . . . . 60_F (16_C)
6
7.5
8.5
10
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS
C08203
Fig. 12 - Cooling Charging Charts
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS (cont.)
C08204
C08228
Fig. 12 (cont.) - Cooling Charging Charts
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS (cont.)
C08229
C08437
Fig. 12 (cont.) - Cooling Charging Charts
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS (cont.)
C08438
C08439
Fig. 12 (cont.) - Cooling Charging Charts
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 1 – Cooling Service Analysis
PROBLEM
CAUSE
REMEDY
Power failure.
Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped.
Call power company.
Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker.
Defective thermostat, contactor, transformer,
or control relay.
Insufficient line voltage.
Incorrect or faulty wiring.
Thermostat setting too high.
Replace component.
Compressor and Condenser
Fan Will Not Start.
Determine cause and correct.
Check wiring diagram and rewire correctly.
Lower thermostat setting below room temperature.
Faulty wiring or loose connections in
compressor circuit.
Compressor motor burned out, seized, or
internal overload open.
Defective run/start capacitor, overload, start
relay.
Check wiring and repair or replace.
Determine cause. Replace compressor.
Determine cause and replace.
Compressor Will Not Start But
Condenser Fan Runs.
Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker. Determine
cause.
Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge
to nameplate.
One leg of three---phase power dead.
Refrigerant overcharge or undercharge.
Defective compressor.
Insufficient line voltage.
Blocked condenser.
Defective run/start capacitor, overload, or start
relay.
Replace and determine cause.
Determine cause and correct.
Determine cause and correct.
Compressor Cycles (other
than normally satisfying ther-
mostat).
Determine cause and replace.
Defective thermostat.
Replace thermostat.
Faulty condenser---fan motor or capacitor.
Restriction in refrigerant system.
Dirty air filter.
Replace.
Locate restriction and remove.
Replace filter.
Unit undersized for load.
Thermostat set too low.
Low refrigerant charge.
Leaking valves in compressor.
Air in system.
Decrease load or increase unit size.
Reset thermostat.
Locate leak; repair and recharge.
Replace compressor.
Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.
Clean coil or remove restriction.
Replace filter.
Compressor Operates
Continuously.
Condenser coil dirty or restricted.
Dirty air filter.
Dirty condenser coil.
Clean coil.
Refrigerant overcharged.
Air in system.
Recover excess refrigerant.
Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.
Determine cause and correct.
Check for leaks; repair and recharge.
Replace compressor.
Remove restriction.
Check for source and eliminate.
Replace compressor.
Excessive Head Pressure.
Condenser air restricted or air short---cycling.
Low refrigerant charge.
Compressor valves leaking.
Restriction in liquid tube.
High head load.
Compressor valves leaking.
Refrigerant overcharged.
Dirty air filter.
Head Pressure Too Low.
Excessive Suction Pressure.
Recover excess refrigerant.
Replace filter.
Low refrigerant charge.
Metering device or low side restricted.
Check for leaks; repair and recharge.
Remove source of restriction.
Suction Pressure Too Low.
Increase air quantity. Check filter and replace if
necessary.
Insufficient evaporator airflow.
Temperature too low in conditioned area.
Reset thermostat.
Outdoor ambient below 25˚F.
Install low---ambient kit.
Evaporator Fan Will Not Shut
Off.
Time off delay not finished.
Wa it f o r 3 0 --- se co n d o f f d e la y.
Compressor Makes Excessive
Noise.
Compressor rotating in wrong direction.
Reverse the 3---phase power leads.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove condenser-fan assembly (grille, motor, and
fan).
3. Loosen fan hub setscrews.
4. Adjust fan height as shown in Fig. 13.
5. Tighten setscrews.
Compressor
Lubrication
The compressor is charged with the correct amount of oil
at the factory.
6. Replace condenser-fan assembly.
!
CAUTION
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to
components.
Conduit
The compressor is in a PuronR refrigerant system and
uses a polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely
hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE
oils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oils
designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Avoid
exposure of the oil to the atmosphere.
0.14 in + 0.0 / -0.03
C08448
Fig. 13 - Condenser Fan Adjustment
Troubleshooting Cooling System
Replacing Compressor
Refer to Table 1 for additional troubleshooting topics.
The compressor used with Puron refrigerant contains a
POE oil. This oil has a high affinity for moisture. Do not
remove the compressor’s tube plugs until ready to insert
the unit suction and discharge tube ends.
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
!
WARNING
Compressor mounting bolt torque is 65-75 ft-lbs.
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Compressor Rotation
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal
injury or death.
On 3-phase units with scroll compressors, it is important
to be certain compressor is rotating in the proper
direction. To determine whether or not compressor is
rotating in the proper direction:
Units with convenience outlet circuits may use
multiple disconnects. Check convenience outlet for
power status before opening unit for service. Locate
its disconnect switch, if appropriate, and open it.
Tag-out this switch, if necessary.
1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pres-
sure fittings.
2. Energize the compressor.
3. The suction pressure should drop and the discharge
pressure should rise, as is normal on any start-up.
NOTE: If the suction pressure does not drop and the
discharge pressure does not rise to normal levels:
4. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotating
in the wrong direction.
5. Turn off power to the unit.
6. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.
7. Reapply power to the compressor.
Two types of convenience outlets are offered on 48TC
models: Non-powered and unit-powered. Both types
provide
a
125-volt
GFCI
(ground-fault
circuit-interrupter) duplex receptacle rated at 15-A
behind a hinged waterproof access cover, located on the
end panel of the unit. See Fig. 14.
Pwd-CO Transformer
Conv Outlet
GFCI
Pwd-CO
Fuse
The suction and discharge pressure levels should now
move to their normal start-up levels.
Switch
NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrong
direction, the unit makes an elevated level of noise and
does not provide cooling.
Filter Drier
Replace whenever refrigerant system is exposed to
atmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid-line filter
driers with working pressures no less than 650 psig. Do
not install a suction-line filter drier in liquid line. A
liquid-line filter drier designed for use with Puron
refrigerant is required on every unit.
C08128
Fig. 14 - Convenience Outlet Location
Non-powered type: This type requires the field
installation of a general-purpose 125-volt 15-A circuit
powered from a source elsewhere in the building. Observe
national and local codes when selecting wire size, fuse or
Condenser--Fan Adjustment
1. Shut off unit power supply. Install lockout tag.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
breaker requirements and disconnect switch size and
location. Route 125-v power supply conductors into the
bottom of the utility box containing the duplex receptacle.
lamps, etc; it is not intended to provide 15-amps loading
for continuous duty loads (such as electric heaters for
overnight use). Observe a 50% limit on circuit loading
above 8-amps (i.e., limit loads exceeding 8-amps to 30
minutes of operation every hour).
Unit-powered type: A unit-mounted transformer is
factory-installed to stepdown the main power supply
voltage to the unit to 115-v at the duplex receptacle. This
option also includes a manual switch with fuse, located in
a utility box and mounted on a bracket behind the
convenience outlet; access is through the unit’s control
box access panel. See Fig. 14.
Maintenance: Periodically test the GFCI receptacle by
pressing the TEST button on the face of the receptacle.
This should cause the internal circuit of the receptacle to
trip and open the receptacle. Check for proper grounding
wires and power line phasing if the GFCI receptacle does
not trip as required. Press the RESET button to clear the
tripped condition.
The primary leads to the convenience outlet transformer
are not factory-connected. Selection of primary power
source is a customer-option. If local codes permit, the
transformer primary leads can be connected at the
Fuse on powered type: The factory fuse is a Bussman
“Fusetron” T-15, non-renewable screw-in (Edison base)
type plug fuse.
line-side terminals on
a
unit-mounted non-fused
disconnect or HACR breaker switch; this will provide
service power to the unit when the unit disconnect switch
or HACR switch is open. Other connection methods will
result in the convenience outlet circuit being de-energized
when the unit disconnect or HACR switch is open. See
Fig. 15.
Using unit-mounted convenience outlets: Units with
unit-mounted convenience outlet circuits will often
require that two disconnects be opened to de-energize all
power to the unit. Treat all units as electrically energized
until the convenience outlet power is also checked and
de-energization is confirmed. Observe National Electrical
Code Article 210, Branch Circuits, for use of convenience
outlets.
SMOKE DETECTORS
Smoke detectors are available as factory-installed options
on 48TC models. Smoke detectors may be specified for
Supply Air only or for Return Air without or with
economizer or in combination of Supply Air and Return
Air. Return Air smoke detectors are arranged for vertical
return configurations only. All components necessary for
operation are factory-provided and mounted. The unit is
factory-configured for immediate smoke detector
shutdown operation; additional wiring or modifications to
unit terminal board may be necessary to complete the unit
and smoke detector configuration to meet project
requirements.
CO8283
System
Fig. 15 - Powered Convenience Outlet Wiring
The smoke detector system consists of a four-wire
controller and one or two sensors. Its primary function is
to shut down the rooftop unit in order to prevent smoke
from circulating throughout the building. It is not to be
used as a life saving device.
UNIT
VOLTAGE
CONNECT
AS
PRIMARY
CONNECTIONS
TRANSFORMER
TERMINALS
208,
230
L1: RED +YEL
L2: BLU + GRA
L1: RED
Splice BLU + YEL
L2: GRA
H1 + H3
H2 + H4
H1
H2 + H3
H4
240
480
600
Controller
460
575
The controller (see Fig. 16) includes a controller housing,
a printed circuit board, and a clear plastic cover. The
controller can be connected to one or two compatible duct
smoke sensors. The clear plastic cover is secured to the
housing with a single captive screw for easy access to the
wiring terminals. The controller has three LEDs (for
Power, Trouble and Alarm) and a manual test/reset button
(on the cover face).
L1: RED
L2: GRA
H1
H2
Duty Cycle: The unit-powered convenience outlet has a
duty cycle limitation. The transformer is intended to
provide power on an intermittent basis for service tools,
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duct smoke sensor
Exhaust gasket
Duct smoke sensor
controller
Exhaust tube
Conduit nuts
(supplied by installer)
Sensor housing
and electronics
See
Detail A
Conduit support plate
Terminal block cover
Cover gasket
(ordering option)
Intake
gasket
Controller housing
and electronics
Cover gasket
(ordering option)
Controller cover
Conduit couplings
(supplied by installer)
TSD-CO2
(ordering option)
Sensor cover
Plug
Fastener
(2X)
Sampling tube
(ordered separately)
Coupling
Detail A
Trouble
Alarm
Power
Test/reset
switch
Magnetic
test/reset
switch
C08208
Fig. 16 - Controller Assembly
Alarm
Trouble
Power
Dirty
C08209
Sensor
Fig. 17 - Smoke Detector Sensor
The sensor (see Fig. 17) includes a plastic housing, a
printed circuit board, a clear plastic cover, a sampling
tube inlet and an exhaust tube. The sampling tube (when
used) and exhaust tube are attached during installation.
The sampling tube varies in length depending on the size
of the rooftop unit. The clear plastic cover permits visual
inspections without having to disassemble the sensor. The
cover attaches to the sensor housing using four captive
screws and forms an airtight chamber around the sensing
electronics. Each sensor includes a harness with an RJ45
terminal for connecting to the controller. Each sensor has
four LEDs (for Power, Trouble, Alarm and Dirty) and a
manual test/reset button (on the left-side of the housing).
For installations using two sensors, the duct smoke
detector does not differentiate which sensor signals an
alarm or trouble condition.
Smoke Detector Locations
Supply Air — The Supply Air smoke detector sensor is
located to the left of the unit’s indoor (supply) fan. See
Fig. 18. Access is through the fan access panel. There is
no sampling tube used at this location. The sampling tube
inlet extends through the side plate of the fan housing
(into a high pressure area). The controller is located on a
bracket to the right of the return filter, accessed through
the lift-off filter panel.
Air is introduced to the duct smoke detector sensor’s
sensing chamber through a sampling tube that extends into
the HVAC duct and is directed back into the ventilation
system through a (shorter) exhaust tube. The difference in
air pressure between the two tubes pulls the sampled air
through the sensing chamber. When a sufficient amount of
smoke is detected in the sensing chamber, the sensor
signals an alarm state and the controller automatically
takes the appropriate action to shut down fans and
blowers, change over air handling systems, notify the fire
alarm control panel, etc.
Smoke Detector Sensor
The sensor uses a process called differential sensing to
prevent gradual environmental changes from triggering
false alarms. A rapid change in environmental conditions,
such as smoke from a fire, causes the sensor to signal an
alarm state but dust and debris accumulated over time
does not.
C08245
Fig. 18 - Typical Supply Air Smoke Detector Sensor
Location
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return Air without Economizer — The sampling tube is
located across the return air opening on the unit basepan.
See Fig. 19. The holes in the sampling tube face
downward, into the return air stream. The sampling tube is
connected via tubing to the return air sensor that is
mounted on a bracket high on the partition between return
filter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in a
flat-mounting location. Installation requires that this
sensor be relocated to its operating location and the tubing
to the sampling tube be connected. See installation steps
below.)
Completing Installation of Return Air Smoke
Sensor:
Screws
Flexible
Exhaust Tubes
Return Air Detector module
(shipping position shown)*
Sample Tube
C08126
Fig. 21 - Return Air Detector Shipping Position
Controller module
1. Unscrew the two screws holding the Return Air
Sensor detector plate. See Fig. 21. Save the screws.
2. Remove the Return Air Sensor and its detector plate.
3. Rotate the detector plate so the sensor is facing out-
wards and the sampling tube connection is on the bot-
tom. See Fig. 22.
4. Screw the sensor and detector plate into its operating
position using screws from Step 1. Make sure the
sampling tube connection is on the bottom and the ex-
haust tube is on the top. See Fig. 22.
5. Connect the flexible tube on the sampling inlet to the
sampling tube on the basepan.
Return Air Detector Sampling Tube
*RA detector must be moved from shipping position to operating position by installer
C07307
Fig. 19 - Typical Return Air Detector Location
Return Air with Economizer — The sampling tube is
inserted through the side plates of the economizer
housing, placing it across the return air opening on the
unit basepan. See Fig. 20. The holes in the sampling tube
face downward, into the return air stream. The sampling
tube is connected via tubing to the return air sensor that is
mounted on a bracket high on the partition between return
filter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in a
flat-mounting location. Installation requires that this
sensor be relocated to its operating location and the tubing
to the sampling tube be connected. See installation steps
below.)
6. For units with an economizer, the sampling tube is in-
tegrated into the economizer housing but the connec-
tion of the flexible tubing to the sampling tube is the
same.
C08127
Fig. 22 - Return Air Sensor Operating Position
FIOP Smoke Detector Wiring and Response
All units: FIOP smoke detector is configured to
automatically shut down all unit operations when smoke
condition is detected. See Fig. 23, Smoke Detector
Wiring.
Return Air
Sampling Tube
C08129
Highlight A: JMP 3 is factory-cut, transferring unit
control to smoke detector.
Fig. 20 - Return Air Sampling Tube Location
Highlight B: Smoke detector NC contact set will open on
smoke alarm condition, de-energizing the ORN
conductor.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
D
C
F
E
A
C08246
Fig. 23 - Typical Smoke Detector System Wiring
Highlight C: 24-v power signal via ORN lead is removed
at Smoke Detector input on LCTB; all unit operations
cease immediately.
Sensor and Controller Tests
Sensor Alarm Test
The sensor alarm test checks a sensor’s ability to signal an
alarm state. This test requires that you use a field provided
SD-MAG test magnet.
PremierLink and RTU-MP Controls: Unit operating
functions (fan, cooling and heating) are terminated as
described above. In addition:
!
CAUTION
Highlight D: On smoke alarm condition, the smoke
detector NO Alarm contact will close, supplying 24-v
power to GRA conductor.
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
Highlight E: GRA lead at Smoke Alarm input on LCTB
provides 24-v signal to FIOP DDC control.
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.
Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliary
equipment from the controller before performing the
test. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarm
system, notify the proper authorities before
performing the test.
Premier-Link: This signal is conveyed to PremierLink
FIOP’s TB1 at terminal TB1-6 (BLU lead). This signal
initiates the FSD sequence by the PremierLink control.
FSD status is reported to connected CCN network.
RTU-MP: The 24-v signal is conveyed to RTU-MP’s
J1-10 input terminal. This signal initiates the FSD
sequence by the RTU-MP control. FSD status is reported
to connected BAS network.
Sensor Alarm Test Procedure
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of
the sensor housing for seven seconds.
2. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns on.
3. Reset the sensor by holding the test magnet against
the sensor housing for two seconds.
Using Remote Logic: Five conductors are provided for
field use (see Highlight F) for additional annunciation
functions.
4. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns off.
Additional Application Data — Refer to Catalog No.
HKRNKA-1XA for discussions on additional control
features of these smoke detectors including multiple unit
coordination. See Fig. 23.
Controller Alarm Test
The controller alarm test checks the controller’s ability to
initiate and indicate an alarm state.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 2 – Dirty LED Test
!
CAUTION
FLASHES
DESCRIPTION
0---25% dirty. (Typical of a newly installed detector)
25---50% dirty
1
2
3
4
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
51---75% dirty
76---99% dirty
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.
Disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controller
before performing the test. If the duct detector is
connected to a fire alarm system, notify the proper
authorities before performing the test.
Dirty Sensor Test Procedure
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of
the sensor housing for two seconds.
2. Verify that the sensor’s Dirty LED flashes.
Controller Alarm Test Procedure
!
1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for seven
seconds.
2. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns on.
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
3. Reset the sensor by pressing the test/reset switch for
two seconds.
Changing the dirty sensor test operation will put the
detector into the alarm state and activate all automatic
alarm responses. Before changing dirty sensor test
operation, disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the
controller and notify the proper authorities if
connected to a fire alarm system.
4. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns off.
Dirty Controller Test
The dirty controller test checks the controller’s ability to
initiate a dirty sensor test and indicate its results.
!
CAUTION
Changing the Dirt Sensor Test
By default, sensor dirty test results are indicated by:
S The sensor’s Dirty LED flashing.
S The controller’s Trouble LED flashing.
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
S The controller’s supervision relay contacts toggle.
The operation of a sensor’s dirty test can be changed so
that the controller’s supervision relay is not used to
indicate test results. When two detectors are connected to
a controller, sensor dirty test operation on both sensors
must be configured to operate in the same manner.
Pressing the controller’s test/reset switch for longer
than seven seconds will put the duct detector into the
alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
Dirty Controller Test Procedure
1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for two
seconds.
To Configure the Dirty Sensor Test Operation
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of
the sensor housing until the sensor’s Alarm LED turns
on and its Dirty LED flashes twice (approximately 60
seconds).
2. Reset the sensor by removing the test magnet then
holding it against the sensor housing again until the
sensor’s Alarm LED turns off (approximately 2
seconds).
2. Verify that the controller’s Trouble LED flashes.
Dirty Sensor Test
The dirty sensor test provides an indication of the sensor’s
ability to compensate for gradual environmental changes.
A sensor that can no longer compensate for environmental
changes is considered 100% dirty and requires cleaning or
replacing. You must use a field provided SD-MAG test
magnet to initiate a sensor dirty test. The sensor’s Dirty
LED indicates the results of the dirty test as shown in
Table 2.
Remote Station Test
The remote station alarm test checks a test/reset station’s
ability to initiate and indicate an alarm state.
!
CAUTION
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
Holding the test magnet against the sensor housing for
more than seven seconds will put the duct detector
into the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm
responses.
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.
Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliary
equipment from the controller before performing the
test. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarm
system, notify the proper authorities before
performing the test.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SD-TRK4 Remote Alarm Test Procedure
Dirty Sensor Test Using an SD-TRK4
1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position for
seven seconds.
1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position for
two seconds.
2. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turns
on.
2. Verify that the test/reset station’s Trouble LED
flashes.
3. Reset the sensor by turning the key switch to the
RESET/TEST position for two seconds.
4. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turns
off.
Detector Cleaning
Cleaning the Smoke Detector
Clean the duct smoke sensor when the Dirty LED is
flashing continuously or sooner if conditions warrant.
Remote Test/Reset Station Dirty Sensor Test
The test/reset station dirty sensor test checks the test/reset
station’s ability to initiate a sensor dirty test and indicate
the results. It must be wired to the controller as shown in
Fig. 24 and configured to operate the controller’s
supervision relay. For more information, see “Changing
sensor dirty test operation.”
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
If the smoke detector is connected to a fire alarm
system, first notify the proper authorities that the
detector is undergoing maintenance then disable the
relevant circuit to avoid generating a false alarm.
12
Smoke Detector Controller
1
TB3
−
1
Auxiliary
equipment
1. Disconnect power from the duct detector then remove
the sensor’s cover. (See Fig. 25.)
+
2
3
14
HVAC duct
Sampling
tube
SD-TRK4
Trouble
Supervision relay
contacts [3]
Sensor
housing
13
19
5
4
1
3
Power
18 Vdc (
+)
Wire must be
Alarm
Optic
plate
Airflow
added by installer
15
2
Reset/Test
Retainer
clip
18 Vdc (
−)
2
20
Optic
housing
C08247
Fig. 24 - Remote Test/Reset Station Connections
C07305
Fig. 25 - Sensor Cleaning Diagram
!
2. Using a vacuum cleaner, clean compressed air, or a
soft bristle brush, remove loose dirt and debris from
inside the sensor housing and cover.
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Use isopropyl alcohol and a lint-free cloth to remove
dirt and other contaminants from the gasket on the
sensor’s cover.
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
If the test/reset station’s key switch is left in the
RESET/TEST position for longer than seven seconds,
the detector will automatically go into the alarm state
and activate all automatic alarm responses.
3. Squeeze the retainer clips on both sides of the optic
housing then lift the housing away from the printed
circuit board.
4. Gently remove dirt and debris from around the optic
plate and inside the optic housing.
5. Replace the optic housing and sensor cover.
6. Connect power to the duct detector then perform a
sensor alarm test.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personnel
and authority concern.
INDICATORS
Normal State
Holding the test magnet to the target area for longer
than seven seconds will put the detector into the alarm
state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
The smoke detector operates in the normal state in the
absence of any trouble conditions and when its sensing
chamber is free of smoke. In the normal state, the Power
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED on both the sensor and the controller are on and all
other LEDs are off.
NOTE: All troubles are latched by the duct smoke
detector. The trouble condition must be cleared and then
the duct smoke detector must be reset in order to restore it
to the normal state.
Alarm State
The smoke detector enters the alarm state when the
amount of smoke particulate in the sensor’s sensing
chamber exceeds the alarm threshold value. (See Table 3.)
Upon entering the alarm state:
S The sensor’s Alarm LED and the controller’s Alarm LED
turn on.
Resetting Alarm and Trouble Condition Trips:
Manual reset is required to restore smoke detector systems
to Normal operation. For installations using two sensors,
the duct smoke detector does not differentiate which
sensor signals an alarm or trouble condition. Check each
sensor for Alarm or Trouble status (indicated by LED).
Clear the condition that has generated the trip at this
sensor. Then reset the sensor by pressing and holding the
reset button (on the side) for 2 seconds. Verify that the
sensor’s Alarm and Trouble LEDs are now off. At the
controller, clear its Alarm or Trouble state by pressing and
holding the manual reset button (on the front cover) for 2
seconds. Verify that the controller’s Alarm and Trouble
LEDs are now off. Replace all panels.
S The contacts on the controller’s two auxiliary relays
switch positions.
S The contacts on the controller’s alarm initiation relay
close.
S The controller’s remote alarm LED output is activated
(turned on).
S The controller’s high impedance multiple fan shutdown
control line is pulled to ground Trouble state.
The SuperDuct duct smoke detector enters the trouble
state under the following conditions:
S A sensor’s cover is removed and 20 minutes pass before
Troubleshooting
Controller’s Trouble LED is On
1. Check the Trouble LED on each sensor connected to
the controller. If a sensor’s Trouble LED is on, de-
termine the cause and make the necessary repairs.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control-
ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace as
required.
it is properly secured.
S A sensor’s environmental compensation limit is reached
(100% dirty).
S A wiring fault between a sensor and the controller is
detected.
An internal sensor fault is detected upon entering the
trouble state:
S The contacts on the controller’s supervisory relay switch
Controller’s Trouble LED is Flashing
1. One or both of the sensors is 100% dirty.
2. Determine which Dirty LED is flashing then clean
that sensor assembly as described in the detector
cleaning section.
positions. (See Fig. 26.)
S If a sensor trouble, the sensor’s Trouble LED the
controller’s Trouble LED turn on.
Sensor’s Trouble LED is On
S If 100% dirty, the sensor’s Dirty LED turns on and the
controller’s Trouble LED flashes continuously.
1. Check the sensor’s Dirty LED. If it is flashing, the
sensor is dirty and must be cleaned.
2. Check the sensor’s cover. If it is loose or missing, se-
cure the cover to the sensor housing.
S If a wiring fault between a sensor and the controller, the
controller’s Trouble LED turns on but not the sensor’s.
3. Replace sensor assembly.
Trouble
Sensor’s Power LED is Off
Alarm
Power
1. Check the controller’s Power LED. If it is off, de-
termine why the controller does not have power and
make the necessary repairs.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control-
ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace as
required.
Test/reset
switch
C07298
Fig. 26 - Controller Assembly
Table 3 – Detector Indicators
CONTROL OR INDICATOR
DESCRIPTION
Resets the sensor when it is in the alarm or trouble state. Activates or tests the sensor when it is in
the normal state.
Magnetic test/reset switch
Alarm LED
Trouble LED
Indicates the sensor is in the alarm state.
Indicates the sensor is in the trouble state.
Indicates the amount of environmental compensation used by the sensor
(flashing continuously = 100%)
Dirty LED
Power LED
Indicates the sensor is energized.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller’s Power LED is Off
The standard supply fan motor is equipped with internal
overcurrent and overtemperature protection. Protection
devices reset automatically.
1. Make sure the circuit supplying power to the control-
ler is operational. If not, make sure JP2 and JP3 are
set correctly on the controller before applying power.
2. Verify that power is applied to the controller’s supply
input terminals. If power is not present, replace or re-
pair wiring as required.
The High Static option supply fan motor is equipped with
a pilot-circuit Thermix combination overtemperature/
overcurrent protection device. This device resets
automatically. Do not bypass this switch to correct
trouble. Determine the cause and correct it.
Remote Test/Reset Station’s Trouble LED Does Not
flash When Performing a Dirty Test, But the Control-
ler’s Trouble LED Does
Condenser Fan Motor Protection
The condenser fan motor is internally protected against
overtemperature.
1. Verify that the remote test/station is wired as shown
in Fig. 24. Repair or replace loose or missing wiring.
Relief Device
2. Configure the sensor dirty test to activate the control-
ler’s supervision relay. See “Changing sensor dirty
test operation.”
A soft solder joint at the suction service access port
provides pressure relief under abnormal temperature and
pressure conditions (i.e., fire in building). Protect this
joint during brazing operations near this joint.
Sensor’s Trouble LED is On, But the Controller’s
Trouble LED is OFF
Remove JP1 on the controller.
Control Circuit, 24--V
The control circuit is protected against overcurrent
conditions by a circuit breaker mounted on control
transformer TRAN. Reset is manual.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Compressor Protection
Overcurrent
GAS HEATING SYSTEM
General
The compressor has internal linebreak motor protection.
Overtemperature
The heat exchanger system consists of a gas valve feeding
multiple inshot burners off a manifold. The burners fire
into matching primary tubes. The primary tubes discharge
into combustion plenum where gas flow converges into
secondary tubes. The secondary tubes exit into the
induced draft fan wheel inlet. The induced fan wheel
discharges into a flue passage and flue gases exit out a
flue hood on the side of the unit. The induced draft fan
motor includes a Hall Effect sensor circuit that confirms
adequate wheel speed via the Integrated Gas Control
(IGC) board. Safety switches include a Rollout Switch (at
the top of the burner compartment) and a limit switch
(mounted through the fan deck, over the tubes). (See Fig.
27 and Fig. 28.)
The compressor has an internal protector to protect it
against excessively high discharge gas temperatures.
High Pressure Switch
The system is provided with a high pressure switch
mounted on the discharge line. The switch is
stem-mounted and brazed into the discharge tube. Trip
setting is 630 psig +/- 10 psig (4344 +/- 69 kPa) when
hot. Reset is automatic at 505 psig (3482 kPa).
Low Pressure Switch
The system is protected against a loss of charge and low
evaporator coil loading condition by a low pressure switch
located on the suction line near the compressor. The
switch is stem-mounted. Trip setting is 54 psig +/- 5 psig
(372 +/- 34 kPa). Reset is automatic at 117 +/- 5 psig
(807 +/- 34 kPa).
INDUCED-
DRAFT
MOTOR
ROLLOUT
SWITCH
MOUNTING
PLATE
Evaporator Freeze Protection
The system is protected against evaporator coil frosting
and low temperature conditions by a temperature switch
mounted on the evaporator coil hairpin. Trip setting is
30_F +/- 5_F (-1_C +/- 3_C). Reset is automatic at 45_F
(7_C).
BURNER
SECTION
FLUE
EXHAUST
VESTIBULE
PLATE
INDUCED-
DRAFT
MOTOR
BLOWER
HOUSING
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
TAP
GAS
VALVE
Supply (Indoor) Fan Motor Protection
Disconnect and lockout power when servicing fan motor.
C06152
Fig. 27 - Burner Section Details
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 6 – Liquid Propane Supply Line Pressure Ranges
Limit Switch
and Shield
UNIT MODEL
48TCD,E,F
48TCS,R,T
UNIT SIZE
MIN
11.0 in. wg
(2740 Pa)
MAX
13.0 in. wg
(3240 Pa)
All
All
48TCL,M,N
NA
NA
Manifold pressure for LP fuel use must be adjusted to
specified range. Follow instructions in the accessory kit to
make initial readjustment.
Table 7 – Liquid Propane Manifold Pressure Ranges
UNIT MODEL
UNIT SIZE
HIGH FIRE
LOW FIRE
48TCD,S
48TCE,R
48TCF,T
C08284
10.0 in. wg
(2490 Pa)
5.0 in. wg
(1245 Pa){
All
Fig. 28 - Limit Switch Location
48TCL,
48TCM,
48TCN
Fuel Types and Pressures
All
NA
NA
Natural Gas — The 48TC unit is factory-equipped for use
with Natural Gas fuel at elevation under 2000 ft (610 m).
See section Orifice Replacement for information in
modifying this unit for installation at elevations above
2000 ft (610 m).
NA: Not Available
{ 3 Phase models only
Supply Pressure Switch — The LP conversion kit includes
a supply low pressure switch. The switch contacts (from
terminal C to terminal NO) will open the gas valve power
whenever the supply line pressure drops below the
setpoint. See Fig. 29 and Fig. 30. If the low pressure
remains open for 15 minutes during a call for heat, the
IGC circuit will initiate a Ignition Fault (5 flashes)
lockout. Reset of the low pressure switch is automatic on
rise in supply line pressure. Reset of the IGC requires a
recycle of unit power after the low pressure switch has
closed.
Gas line pressure entering the unit’s main gas valve must
be within specified ranges. Adjust unit gas regulator valve
as required or consult local gas utility.
Table 4 – Natural Gas Supply Line Pressure Ranges
UNIT MODEL
UNIT SIZE
MIN
4.0 in. wg
(996 Pa)
MAX
13.0 in. wg
(3240 Pa)
48TC
All
Manifold pressure is factory-adjusted for NG fuel use.
Adjust as required to obtain best flame characteristic.
Table 5 – Natural Gas Manifold Pressure Ranges
UNIT
MODEL
UNIT
SIZE
HIGH
FIRE
LOW
FIRE
RANGE
48TCD,S
48TCE,R
48TCF,T
3.5 in. wg 1.7 in. wg 2.0---5.0 in. wg (Hi)
All
All
(872 Pa) (423 Pa){
(498---1245 Pa)
48TCL
48TCM
48TCN
3.5 in. wg
NA
2.0---5.0 in. wg (Hi)
(498---1245 Pa)
(872 Pa)
NA: Not Available
{ 3 Phase models only
C08238
Fig. 29 - LP Low Pressure Switch (Installed)
Liquid Propane — Accessory packages are available for
field-installation that will convert the 48TC unit (except
low NOx model) to operate with Liquid Propane (LP)
fuels. These kits include new orifice spuds, new springs
for gas valves and a supply line low pressure switch. See
section on Orifice Replacement for details on orifice size
selections.
LP LPS
IGC
BRN
BRN
C
NO
J2-11
C
MGV
IGC
GRA
Low NOx models include specially-sized orifices and use
of different flue flow limits and tube baffles. Because of
these extra features, conversion of these models to LP is
not recommended.
J2-12
TSTAT
W2
PNK
C08285
Fig. 30 - LP Supply Line Low Pressure Switch Wiring
Fuel line pressure entering unit gas valve must remain
within specified range.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This switch also prevents operation when the propane tank
level is low which can result in gas with a high
concentration of impurities, additives, and residues that
have settled to the bottom of the tank. Operation under
these conditions can cause harm to the heat exchanger
system. Contact your fuel supplier if this condition is
suspected.
season, inspect blower wheel bi
proper cleaning frequency.
-monthly to determine
To access burner section, slide the sliding burner partition
out of the unit.
To inspect blower wheel, shine a flashlight into draft hood
opening. If cleaning is required, remove motor and wheel
as follows:
Flue Gas Passageways
1. Slide burner access panel out.
2. Remove the 7 screws that attach induced-draft motor
housing to vestibule plate. (See Fig. 31.)
3. The blower wheel can be cleaned at this point. If ad-
ditional cleaning is required, continue with Steps 4
and 5.
4. To remove blower from the motor shaft, remove 2
setscrews.
5. To remove motor, remove the 4 screws that hold the
motor to mounting plate. Remove the motor cooling
fan by removing one setscrew. Then remove nuts that
hold motor to mounting plate.
To inspect the flue collector box and upper areas of the
heat exchanger:
1. Remove the combustion blower wheel and motor as-
sembly according to directions in Combustion-Air
Blower section. See Fig. 31.
2. Remove the flue cover to inspect the heat exchanger.
3. Clean all surfaces as required using a wire brush.
Combustion--Air Blower
Clean periodically to assure proper airflow and heating
efficiency. Inspect blower wheel every fall and
periodically during heating season. For the first heating
6. To reinstall, reverse the procedure outlined above.
Regulator
Gasket
Heater Tube
Assembly
Seal Strips, Sponge Rubber
Regulator
Baffle Assembly
(Low NOx only)
Retainer
Support
Insulation
Assembly
Wind Cap Assembly
(shown inverted,
as shipped)
Flue Baffle
(Low NOx only)
Inducer Fan-Motor
Assembly
Burner Assembly
C08227
Fig. 31 - Heat Exchanger Assembly
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Slide the burner tray out of the unit (Fig. 33).
9. To reinstall, reverse the procedure outlined above.
Cleaning and Adjustment
Burners and Igniters
!
CAUTION
1. Remove burner rack from unit as described in Re-
moval and Replacement of Gas Train section, above.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in
equipment damage.
2. Inspect burners; if dirty, remove burners from rack.
(Mark each burner to identify its position before re-
moving from the rack.)
3. Use a soft brush to clean burners and cross-over port
as required.
When working on gas train, do not hit or plug
orifice spuds.
Main Burners
4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 35 and Fig. 36.)
5. If factory orifice has been removed, check that each
orifice is tight at its threads into the manifold pipe
and that orifice projection does not exceed maximum
valve. See Fig. 32
6. Reinstall burners on rack in the same locations as
factory-installed. (The outside crossover flame re-
gions of the outermost burners are pinched off to pre-
vent excessive gas flow from the side of the burner
assembly. If the pinched crossovers are installed
between two burners, the flame will not ignite prop-
erly.)
To access burners, remove burner access panel and slide
out burner partition. At the beginning of each heating
season, inspect for deterioration or blockage due to
corrosion or other causes. Observe the main burner flames
and adjust, if necessary.
Orifice projection — Refer to Fig. 32 for maximum
projection dimension for orifice face to manifold tube.
Orifice
INTEGRATED GAS UNIT
CONTROLLER (IGC)
1.00-in
(25.4 mm)
RACEWAY
Manifold
Pipe
C08211
Fig. 32 - Orifice Projection
Removal and Replacement of Gas Train
See Fig. 27, Fig. 31 and Fig. 33.
1. Shut off manual gas valve.
2. Shut off power to unit.
HOLE IN END PANEL (HIDDEN)
3. Slide out burner partition.
C08454
4. Disconnect gas piping at unit gas valve.
Fig. 34 - Unit Control Box/IGC Location
5. Remove wires connected to gas valve. Mark each
wire.
7. Reinstall burner rack as described in Removal and
Replacement of Gas Train section, above.
Gas Valve — All three-phase models (except Low NOx)
are equipped with 2-stage gas valves. Single-phase
models and all Low NOx models are equipped with
single-stage gas valves. See Fig. 37 for locations of
adjustment screws and features on the gas valves.
To adjust gas valve pressure settings:
IMPORTANT: Leak check all gas connections including
the main service connection, gas valve, gas spuds, and
manifold pipe plug. All leaks must be repaired before
firing unit.
C06153
Fig. 33 - Burner Tray Details
Check Unit Operation and Make Necessary Adjust-
ments
6. Remove igniter wires and sensor wires at the Integ-
rated Gas Unit Controller (IGC). (See Fig. 34.)
7. Remove the 2 screws that attach the burner rack to
the vestibule plate (Fig. 31).
NOTE: Gas supply pressure at gas valve inlet must be
within specified ranges for fuel type and unit size. See
Table 4 and Table 5.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove manifold pressure tap plug from manifold
and connect pressure gauge or manometer. (See Fig.
33.)
10. Turn off unit, remove pressure manometer and re-
place the 1/8 in. pipe fitting on the gas manifold. (See
Fig. 32.)
2. Turn on electrical supply.
Limit Switch
3. Turn on unit main gas valve.
Remove blower access panel. Limit switch is located on
the fan deck. See Fig. 28.
4. Set room thermostat to call for heat. If unit has two-
stage gas valve, verify high-stage heat operation be-
fore attempting to adjust manifold pressure.
Burner Ignition
5. When main burners ignite, check all fittings, mani-
fold, and orifices for leaks.
6. Adjust high-stage pressure to specified setting by
turning the plastic adjustment screw clockwise to in-
crease pressure, counter-clockwise to decrease pres-
sure.
7. For Two-Stage Gas Valves set room thermostat to
call for low-stage heat. Adjust low-stage pressure to
specified setting.
Unit is equipped with a direct spark ignition 100% lockout
system. Integrated Gas Unit Controller (IGC) is located in
the control box. See Fig. 34. The IGC contains a
self-diagnostic LED (light-emitting diode). A single LED
(see Fig. 38) on the IGC provides a visual display of
operational or sequential problems when the power supply
is uninterrupted. When a break in power occurs, the IGC
will be reset (resulting in a loss of fault history) and the
indoor (evaporator) fan ON/OFF times will be reset. The
LED error code can be observed through the viewport.
During servicing refer to the label on the control box
cover or Table 8 for an explanation of LED error code
descriptions.
8. Replace regulator cover screw(s) when finished.
9. With burner access panel removed, observe unit heat-
ing operation in both high stage and low stage opera-
tion if so equipped. Observe burner flames to see if
they are blue in appearance, and that the flames are
approximately the same for each burner.
If lockout occurs, unit may be reset by interrupting power
supply to unit for at least 5 seconds.
LOW HEAT
72,000 BTUH INPUT AND 60,000 BTUH INPUT
MEDIUM AND HIGH HEAT
115,000 BTUH INPUT,
150,000 BTUH INPUT,
90,000BTUH INPUT AND
120,000 BTUH INPUT
C06154
Fig. 35 - Spark Adjustment (04-07)
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125,000/90,000 BTUH INPUT
180,000/120,000 BTUH INPUT
240,000/180,000 BTUH INPUT
250,000/200,000 BTUH INPUT
C08447
Fig. 36 - Spark Adjustment (08-12)
Table 8 – LED Error Code Description*
IMPORTANT: Refer to Troubleshooting Table 13 and
Table 14 for additional information.
ERROR CODE
LED INDICATION
Orifice Replacement
DESCRIPTION
ON
Normal Operation
This unit uses orifice type LH32RFnnn (where nnn
indicates orifice reference size). When replacing unit
orifices, order the necessary parts via Carrier RCD. See
Table 10 for available orifice sizes. See Table 11 and
Table 12 for orifice sizes for Natural Gas and LP fuel
usage at various elevations above sea level.
OFF
Hardware Failure
1 Flash{
2 Flashes
3 Flashes
4 Flashes
5 Flashes
6 Flashes
7 Flashes
8 Flashes
9 Flashes
Evaporator Fan On/Off Delay Modified
Limit Switch Fault
Flame Sense Fault
4 Consecutive Limit Switch Faults
Ignition Lockout Fault
Induced---Draft Motor Fault
Rollout Switch Fault
Check that each replacement orifice is tight at its threads
into the manifold pipe and that orifice projection does not
exceed maximum value. See Fig. 32.
Internal Control Fault
Software Lockout
LEGEND
LED --- L ig h t E m it t in g D i o d e
* . A 3---second pause exists between LED error code flashes. If
more than one error code exists, all applicable codes will be
displayed in numerical sequence.
{
Indicates a code that is not an error. The unit will continue to
operate when this code is displayed.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Stage
Single Stage
C08210
Fig. 37 - Gas Valves
Red LED-Status
C08452
Fig. 38 - Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9 – IGC Connections
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
TERMINAL LABEL
POINT DESCRIPTION
SENSOR LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
INPUTS
RT, C
SS
Input power from TRAN 1
Speed sensor
control box
gas section
gas section
LCTB
24 VAC
—
analog input
switch input
24 VAC
J1, 1-3
—
FS, T1
W
Flame sensor
Heat stage 1
J2, 2
RS
Rollout switch
gas section
fan section
—
switch input
switch input
switch input
J2, 5-6
J2, 7-8
J2, 9-10
LS
Limit switch
CS
Centrifugal switch (not used)
OUTPUTS
L1, CM
IFO
Induced draft combustion motor
Indoor fan
gas section
control box
gas section
line VAC
relay
J2, 1
GV
Gas valve (heat stage 1)
relay
J2, 11-12
Table 10 – Orifice Sizes
ORIFICE
CARRIER
DRILL
DRILL SIZE
PART NUMBER
DIA. (in.)
0.1285
0.1250
0.1200
0.1160
0.1130
0.1110
0.1100
0.1065
0.1040
0.1015
0.0995
0.0980
0.0960
0.0935
0.0890
0.0860
0.0820
0.0810
0.0785
0.0760
0.0730
0.0700
0.0670
0.0635
0.0595
0.0550
0.0520
0.0465
0.0430
0.0420
#30
1/8
LH32RF129
LH32RF125
LH32RF120
LH32RF116
LH32RF113
LH32RF111
LH32RF110
LH32RF105
LH32RF104
LH32RF102
LH32RF103
LH32RF098
LH32RF096
LH32RF094
LH32RF089
LH32RF086
LH32RF082
LH32RF080
LH32RF079
LH32RF076
LH32RF073
LH32RF070
LH32RF067
LH32RF065
LH32RF060
LH32RF055
LH32RF052
LH32RF047
LH32RF043
LH32RF042
#31
#32
#33
#34
#35
#36
#37
#38
#39
#40
#41
#42
#43
#44
#45
#46
#47
#48
#49
#50
#51
#52
#53
#54
#55
#56
#57
#58
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 11 – Altitude Compensation* (A04-A07)
72,000 BTUH
Nominal
115,000 BTUH
Nominal
150,000 BTUH
Nominal
ELEVATION
ft (m)
NG
LP
NG
LP
NG
Orifice Size
†30
LP
Orifice Size
Orifice Size
Orifice Size
Orifice Size
Orifice Size
1
4
1
3
3
0 --- 2000 (610)
2000 (610)
3000 (914)
33
51
33
35
35
36
36
37
38
39
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
46
1
4
1
4
3
35
51
†30
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
1
4
1
4
1
3
35
52
31
31
31
31
32
33
34
35
1
4
1
4
1
3
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
6000 (1829)
7000 (2134)
8000 (2438)
9000 (2743)
10000 (3048)
11000 (3353)
12000 (3658)
13000 (3962)
14000 (4267)
36
52
1
4
1
4
1
3
36
52
2
4
2
4
1
3
37
52
2
4
2
4
1
3
38
53
2
4
2
4
1
3
39
53
4
4
1
3
†40
†41
†42
†43
†43
53
†40
†41
†42
†43
†43
53
53
53
54
54
55
4
4
1
3
54
4
4
1
4
54
36
37
38
4
4
2
4
54
4
4
2
4
55
2
2
4
4
44
†56
44
†40
53
Table 11 (cont.) - Altitude Compensation* (A08-A12)
125,000
BTUH Nominal
250,000
180,000, 224,000
BTUH Nominal
BTUH Nominal
ELEVATION
ft (m)
NG Orifice
LP Orifice
NG Orifice
LP Orifice
NG Orifice
LP Orifice
Size
Size
Size
†30
†30
Size
46
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
Size
Size
1
3
3
1
3
0 --- 2000 (610)
2000 (610)
3000 (914)
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
49
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
31
48
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
1
3
3
1
3
32
1
3
1
3
1
3
31
31
31
31
32
33
34
35
32
1
3
1
3
1
3
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
6000 (1829)
7000 (2134)
8000 (2438)
9000 (2743)
10000 (3048)
11000 (3353)
12000 (3658)
13000 (3962)
14000 (4267)
33
1
4
1
3
1
3
33
1
4
1
3
1
3
34
1
4
1
3
1
3
35
1
4
1
3
1
4
36
2
4
1
3
2
4
37
38
39
52
52
53
37
51
52
52
2
4
1
3
2
4
38
2
4
1
4
2
4
36
37
38
39
4
2
4
4
†41
†42
†43
53
54
54
†41
†42
†43
53
53
54
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
†40
53
LEGEND
NG = Natural Gas
LP = Liquid Propane
1 = CRLPELEV001A00
2 = CRLPELEV002A00
3 = CRLPELEV003A00
4 = CRLPELEV004A00
*
As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxygen
per cubic ft. of air. Therefore, heat input rate should be reduced
at higher altitudes.
{
Not included in kit. May be purchased separately through
dealer.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 12 – Altitude Compensation* (A04-A06) - Low NOx Units
60,000, 90,000
120,000
BTUH Nominal
ELEVATION
ft (m)
BTUH Nominal
NG Orifice Size
LP Orifice Size
NG Orifice Size
LP Orifice Size
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
0 --- 2000 (610)
2000 (610)
3000 (914)
38
39
53
32
33
34
35
35
36
36
37
38
50
2
4
4
54
51
4
4
†40
†41
†41
†42
†42
†43
†43
54
51
4
4
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
6000 (1829)
7000 (2134)
8000 (2438)
9000 (2743)
10000 (3048)
11000 (3353)
12000 (3658)
13000 (3962)
14000 (4267)
54
51
4
4
54
51
4
4
54
52
4
4
54
52
4
4
55
52
4
4
55
53
2
4
4
44
55
†40
†41
†42
†43
†43
53
2
4
4
44
55
53
2
4
45
†56
†56
†56
54
3
4
47
54
3
4
48
55
LEGEND
NG = Natural Gas
LP = Liquid Propane
1 = CRLPELEV001A00
*
As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxygen
per cubic ft. of air. Therefore, heat input rate should be reduced
at higher altitudes.
Not included in kit. May be purchased separately through
dealer.
2 = CRLPELEV002A00
3 = CRLPELEV003A00
4 = CRLPELEV004A00
{
Minimum heating entering air temperature
heating is initiated using low entering air temperatures
with insufficient heating temperature rise.
When operating on first stage heating, the minimum
temperature of air entering the dimpled heat exchanger is
50_F continuous and 45_F intermittent for standard heat
exchangers and 40_F continuous and 35_F intermittent for
stainless steel heat exchangers. To operate at lower
mixed-air temperatures, a field-supplied outdoor-air
thermostat must be used to initiate both stages of heat
when the temperature is below the minimum required
temperature to ensure full fire operation. Wire the
outdoor-air thermostat OALT (part no. HH22AG106) in
series with the second stage gas valve. See Fig. 39. Set the
outdoor-air thermostat at 35_F for stainless steel heat
exchangers or 45_F for standard heat exchangers. This
temperature setting will bring on the second stage of heat
whenever the ambient temperature is below the thermostat
setpoint. Indoor comfort may be compromised when
Thermostat
TH1
LCTB
W1
OALT
TH2
W2
C08442
Fig. 39 - OATL Connections
Troubleshooting Heating System
Refer to Table 13 and Table 14 for additional
troubleshooting topics.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 13 – Heating Service Analysis
PROBLEM
CAUSE
REMEDY
Check flame ignition and sensor electrode positioning.
Adjust as needed.
Misaligned spark electrodes.
Check gas line for air, purge as necessary. After purging
gas line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutes
before attempting to relight unit.
No gas at main burners.
Check gas valve.
Water in gas line.
No power to furnace.
Drain water and install drip leg to trap water.
Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breaker.
Burners Will Not Ignite.
No 24 v power supply to control
circuit.
Check transformer. Transformers with internal overcurrent
protection require a cool down period before resetting.
Miswired or loose connections.
Check all wiring and wire nut connections.
Burned---out heat anticipator in
thermostat.
Replace thermostat.
Broken thermostat wires.
Dirty air filter.
Run continuity check. Replace wires, if necessary.
Clean or replace filter as necessary.
Check gas pressure at manifold. Clock gas meter for input.
If too low, increase manifold pressure, or replace with
correct orifices.
Gas input to unit too low.
Unit undersized for application.
Restricted airflow.
Replace with proper unit or add additional unit.
Clean filter, replace filter, or remove any restrictions.
Use high speed tap, increase fan speed, or install optional
blower, as suitable for individual units.
Inadequate Heating.
Blower speed too low.
Check rotation of blower, thermostat heat anticipator
settings, and temperature rise of unit. Adjust as needed.
Adjust minimum position.
Limit switch cycles main burners.
Too much outdoor air.
Check economizer operation.
Check all screws around flue outlets and burner
compartment. Tighten as necessary.
Cracked heat exchanger.
Overfired unit — reduce input, change orifices, or adjust
gas line or manifold pressure.
Check vent for restriction. Clean as necessary.
Check orifice to burner alignment.
Incomplete combustion (lack of
combustion air) results in:
Aldehyde odors, CO, sooting
flame, or floating flame.
Poor Flame
Characteristics.
Burners Will Not Turn
Off.
Unit is locked into Heating mode
for a one minute minimum.
Wait until mandatory one---minute time period has elapsed
or reset power to unit.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 14 – IGC Board LED Alarm Codes
LED
FLASH
CODE
ACTION TAKEN BY
RESET METHOD
CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
PROBABLE CAUSE
On
Normal Operation
—
—
—
Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 amp
fuse on IGC, power to unit, 24V circuit
breaker, transformer, and wiring to the
IGC.
Off
Hardware Failure
Limit Switch Fault
No gas heating.
—
High temperature limit switch is open.
Check the operation of the indoor (evapo-
rator) fan motor.
Ensure that the supply-air temperature
rise is within the range on the unit name-
plate. Check wiring and limit switch opera-
tion.
Gas valve and igniter
Off.
Indoor fan and inducer
On.
2
Limit switch closed,
or heat call (W) Off.
Flashes
Flame sense normal. The IGC sensed a flame when the gas
Power reset for LED valve should be closed. Check wiring,
3
Indoor fan and inducer
On.
Flame Sense Fault
Flashes
reset.
flame sensor, and gas valve operation.
Heat call (W) Off.
Power reset for LED
reset.
4
Four Consecutive Limit
4 consecutive limit switch faults within a
single call for heat. See Limit Switch Fault.
No gas heating.
Flashes Switch Fault
Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for
15 minutes. Check igniter and flame sen-
sor electrode spacing, gaps, etc. Check
Heat call (W) Off.
5
Ignition Fault
Flashes
No gas heating.
Power reset for LED flame sense and igniter wiring. Check gas
reset.
valve operation and gas supply. Check
gas valve connections to IGC terminals.
BRN lead must be on Pin 11.
Inducer sense On when heat call Off, or
inducer sense Off when heat call On.
Check wiring, voltage, and operation of
IGC motor. Check speed sensor wiring to
IGC.
If heat off: no gas
heating.
If heat on: gas valve
Off and inducer On.
Inducer sense nor-
mal, or heat call (W)
Off.
6
Induced Draft Motor
Flashes Fault
Gas valve and igniter
Rollout switch has opened. Check gas
valve operation. Check induced-draft
blower wheel is properly secured to motor
shaft.
7
Off.
Rollout Switch Lockout
Power reset.
Power reset.
Indoor fan and inducer
On.
Flashes
IGC has sensed internal hardware or soft-
ware error. If fault is not cleared by reset-
ting 24 v power, replace the IGC.
8
Internal Control Lockout No gas heating.
Flashes
9
Temporary Software
1 hour auto reset, or Electrical interference is disrupting the
power reset. IGC software.
No gas heating.
Flashes Lockout
LEGEND
IGC --- Integrated Gas Unit Control
LED --- L ig h t --- E m it t in g D i o d e
NOTES:
1. There is a 3---second pause between alarm code displays.
2. If more than one alarm code exists, all applicable alarm codes will be displayed in numerical sequence.
3. Alarm codes on the IGC will be lost if power to the unit is interrupted.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C08199
Fig. 40 - PremierLink Controller
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor
—
On
PREMIERLINKT CONTROL
FIOP-equipped 48TC unit, the unit is supplied with a
supply-air temperature (SAT) sensor (33ZCSENSAT).
This sensor is a tubular probe type, approx 6-inches (12.7
mm) in length. It is a nominal 10-k ohm thermistor. See
Table 15 for temperature-resistance characteristic.
The PremierLink controller (see Fig. 40) is compatible
with Carrier Comfort Networkr (CCN) devices. This
control is designed to allow users the access and ability to
change factory-defined settings, thus expanding the
function of the standard unit control board. CCN service
access tools include System Pilot (TM), Touch Pilot (TM)
and Service Tool. (Standard tier display tools Navigatort
and Scrolling Marquee are not suitable for use with latest
PremierLink controller (Version 2.x).)
The SAT is factory-wired. The SAT probe is wire-tied to
the supply-air opening (on the horizontal opening end) in
its shipping position. Remove the sensor for installation.
Re-position the sensor in the flange of the supply-air
opening or in the supply air duct (as required by local
codes). Drill or punch a 1/2-in. hole in the flange or duct.
Use two field-supplied, self-drilling screws to secure the
sensor probe in a horizontal orientation. See Fig. 41.
The PremierLink control is factory-mounted in the 48TC
unit’s main control box to the left of the LCTB. Factory
wiring is completed through harnesses connected to the
LCTB thermostat. Field connections are made at a
16-pole terminal block (TB1) located on the bottom shelf
of the unit control box in front of the PremierLink
controller The factory-installed PremierLink control
includes the supply-air temperature (SAT) sensor. The
outdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is included in the
FIOP/accessory EconoMi$er 2 package.
Refer to Fig. 40 for PremierLink connection locations.
NOTE:
Refer to Form 33CS-58SI for complete
PremierLink configuration, operating sequences and
troubleshooting information. Have a copy of this manual
available at unit start-up.
ROOF
CURB
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SUPPLY AIR
RETURN AIR
The PremierLink controller requires the use of a Carrier
electronic thermostat or a CCN connection for time
broadcast to initiate its internal timeclock. This is
necessary for broadcast of time of day functions
(occupied/unoccupied).
C08200
Fig. 41 - Typical Mounting Location for Supply Air
Temperature (SAT) Sensor on Small Rooftop Units
NOTE: PremierLink controller is shipped in Sensor
mode. To be used with a thermostat, the PremierLink
controller must be configured to Thermostat mode. Refer
to PremierLink Configuration instructions for Operating
Mode.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 15 – Thermistor Resistance vs Temperature
Values for Space Temperature Sensor, Supply Air
Temperature Sensor, and Outdoor Air Temperature
Sensor
Field connections — Field connections for accessory
sensor and input devices are made at the 16-pole terminal
block (TB1) located on the control box bottom shelf in
front of the PremierLink control. Some input devices also
require a 24-vac signal source; connect at LCTB terminal
R at “THERMOSTAT” connection strip for this signal
source. See connections figures on following pages for
field connection locations (and for continued connections
at the PremierLink board inputs).
TEMP
(C)
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
--- 40
--- 35
--- 30
--- 25
--- 20
--- 15
--- 10
--- 5
0
5
10
15
20
--- 40
--- 31
--- 22
--- 13
--- 4
5
14
23
32
41
335,651
242,195
176,683
130,243
96,974
72,895
55,298
42,315
32,651
25,395
19,903
15,714
12,494
10,000
8,056
Table 17 provides a summary of field connections for
units equipped with Space Sensor. Table 18 provides a
summary of field connections for units equipped with
Space Thermostat.
Space Sensors
-
The PremierLink controller is
factory-shipped configured for Space Sensor Mode. A
Carrier T-55 or T-56 space sensor must be used. T-55
space temperature sensor provides a signal of space
temperature to the PremierLink control T-56 provides
same space temperature signal plus it allows for
adjustment of space temperature setpoints from the face of
the sensor by the occupants. See Table 15 for temperature
versus resistance characteristic on the space sensors.
50
59
68
77
25
30
86
35
95
6,530
Connect T-55 - See Fig. 43 for typical T-55 internal
connections. Connect the T-55 SEN terminals to TB1
terminals 1 and 3 (see Fig. 44).
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
104
113
122
131
140
149
158
5,325
4,367
3,601
2,985
2,487
2,082
1,752
1
2
4
5
6
3
NOTE: The sensor must be mounted in the discharge
airstream downstream of the cooling coil and any heating
devices. Be sure the probe tip does not come in contact
with any of the unit’s heater surfaces.
RED(+)
WHT(GND)
CCN COM
BLK(-)
SEN
SW1
BRN (GND)
BLU (SPT)
SENSOR WIRING
Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor — The OAT is
factory-mounted in the EconoMi$er
2
(FIOP or
accessory). It is a nominal 10k ohm thermistor attached to
an eyelet mounting ring. See Table 15 for
temperature-resistance characteristic.
EconoMi$er 2 — The PremierLink control is used with
EconoMi$er 2 (option or accessory) for outdoor air
management. The damper position is controlled directly
by the PremierLink control; EconoMi$er 2 has no internal
logic device.
C08201
Fig. 43 - T-55 Space Temperature Sensor Wiring
TB1
1
PL
Outdoor air management functions can be enhanced with
field-installation of these accessory control devices:
SEN
SEN
J6-7
Enthalpy control (outdoor air or differential sensors)
Space CO2 sensor
J6-6
3
C08212
Outdoor air CO2 sensor
Fig. 44 - PremierLink T-55 Sensor
Refer to Table 16 for accessory part numbers.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 16 – PremierLink Sensor Usage
OUTDOOR AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
RETURN AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR
ENTHALPY SENSOR
RETURN AIR
ENTHALPY SENSOR
APPLICATION
Differential Dry Bulb
Temperature with
PremierLink
(PremierLink requires
4---20 mA Actuator)
Single Enthalpy with
PremierLink
(PremierLink requires
4 --- 20m A A ctuator)
Differential Enthalpy
with PremierLink
(PremierLink requires
4 --- 20m A A ctuator)
R eq uired ---
33ZCT55SPT
or equivalent
I ncluded ---
---
---
---
CRTEMPSN001A00
R eq uires ---
HH57AC077
or equivalent
I ncluded ---
Not Used
---
---
R eq uires ---
HH57AC077
or equivalent
Requires ---
HH57AC078
or equivalent
I ncluded ---
Not Used
NOTES:
CO Sensors (Optional):
2
33ZCSENCO2 --- Room sensor (adjustable). Aspirator box is required for duct mounting of the sensor.
33ZCASPCO2 --- Aspirator box used for duct---mounted CO room sensor.
2
33ZCT55CO2 --- Space temperature and CO room sensor with override.
2
33ZCT56CO2 --- Space temperature and CO room sensor with override and setpoint.
2
Table 17 – Space Sensor Mode
TB1 TERMINAL
FIELD CONNECTION
T55---SEN/T56---SEN
RMTOCC
T55---SEN/T56---SEN
CMPSAFE
INPUT SIGNAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Analog (10k thermistor)
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog (10k thermistor)
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog (10k thermistor)
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog, 24VDC
T56---SET
FSD
LOOP---PWR
8
9
SPS
IAQ---SEN
FILTER
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog, 4---20mA
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog, 4---20mA
Digital, , 5VDC
Analog, 4---20mA
Digital, 5VDC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I A Q --- CO M /O A Q --- CO M /R H --- CO M
CCN + (RED)
O A Q --- S E N /R H --- S E N
CCN Gnd (WHT)
AUX OUT(Power Exhaust)
CCN --- (BLK)
(Output)Discrete 24VAC
Digital, 5VDC
LEGEND:
T55
--- Space Temperature Sensor
--- Space Temperature Sensor
F S D
IAQ
--- F ir e S h u t d o w n
--- Indoor Air Quality (CO )
T56
2
CCN
--- Carrier Comfort Network (communication bus)
OAQ
--- Outdoor Air Quality (CO )
2
CMPSAFE
FILTER
--- Compressor Safety
--- Dirty Filter Switch
RH
SFS
--- Relative Humidity
--- Supply Fan Status
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 18 – Thermostat Mode
TB1 TERMINAL
FIELD CONNECTION
INPUT SIGNAL
Analog (10k thermistor)
Discrete, 24VAC
1
2
RAT SEN
G
3
4
RAT SEN
Y1
Analog (10k thermistor)
Discrete, 24VAC
5
6
7
8
Y2
LOOP---PWR
W1
I A Q --- S E N
Discrete, 24VAC
Analog, 24VDC
Discrete, 24VAC
A nalog, 4 --- 20m A
Discrete, 24VAC
A nalog, 4 --- 20m A
Digital, 5VDC
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
W2
I A Q --- CO M /O A Q --- CO M /R H --- CO M
CCN + (RED)
O A Q --- S E N /R H --- S E N
CCN Gnd (WHT)
AUX OUT (Power Exhaust)
CCN --- (BLK)
A nalog, 4 --- 20m A
Digital, 5VDC
(Output) Discrete 24VAC
Digital, 5VDC
LEGEND:
CCN
---
---
---
---
---
Carrier Comfort Network (communication bus)
T h e r m o st a t Fa n
RH
W1
W2
Y1
---
---
---
---
---
Relative Humidity
G
Thermostat Heat Stage 1
Thermostat Heat Stage 2
Thermostat Cool Stage 1
Thermostat Cool Stage 2
IAQ
OAQ
RAT
Indoor Air Quality (CO )
2
Outdoor Air Quality (CO )
2
Return Air Temperature
Y2
Connect T-56
-
See Fig. 45 for T-56 internal
Connect Thermostat — A 7-wire thermostat connection
requires a 24-v power source and a common connection.
Use the R and C terminals on the LCTB’s THERMOSTAT
connection strip for these. Connect the thermostat’s Y1,
Y2, W1, W2 and G terminals to PremierLink TB1 as
shown in Fig. 47.
connections. Install a jumper between SEN and SET
terminals as illustrated. Connect T-56 terminals to TB1
terminals 1, 3 and 5 (see Fig. 46).
LCTB
SPACE
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
1
2
4
5
6
3
RED(+)
R
TB1
2
R
WHT(GND)
CCN COM
BLK(-)
PL
J4-12
SET
SEN
G
Y1
Y2
W1
W2
C
SW1
BLK
(T56)
BRN (GND)
BLU (SPT)
SENSOR WIRING
J4-10
J4-8
J4-6
4
6
JUMPER
TERMINALS
AS SHOWN
8
J4-4
10
C
LCTB
THERMOSTAT
Cool
Warm
C08202
C08119
Fig. 45 - T-56 Internal Connections
Fig. 47 - Space Thermostat Connections
TB1
1
PL
If the 48TC unit has an economizer system and
free-cooling operation is required, a sensor representing
Return Air Temperature must also be connected
(field-supplied and installed). This sensor may be a T-55
Space Sensor (see Fig. 43) installed in the space or in the
return duct, or it may be sensor PNO 33ZCSENSAT,
installed in the return duct. Connect this sensor to TB1-1
and TB1-3 per Fig. 44. Temperature-resistance
characteristic is found in Table 15.
SEN
SEN
J6-7
PL
TB1
3
J6-6
Jumper
SET
SET
J6-5
5
C08213
Fig. 46 - PremierLink T-56 Sensor
Configure the unit for Thermostat Mode — Connect to the
CCN bus using a CCN service tool and navigate to
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PremierLink Configuration screen for Operating Mode.
Default setting is Sensor Mode (value 1). Change the
value to 0 to reconfigure the controller for Thermostat
Mode.
return air sensor is wired to the enthalpy controller
(HH57AC077). See Fig. 49.
ENTHALPY CONTROLLER
(OUTDOOR
AIR
ENTHALPY
SENSOR)
S
+
RED
BRN
When the PremierLink is configured for Thermostat
Mode, these functions are not available: Fire Shutdown
(FSD), Remote Occupied (RMTOCC), Compressor Safety
(CMPSAFE), Supply Fan Status (SFS), and Filter Pressure
Switch (FILTER).
B
TR
SO
TR1
BLK
RED
C
D
A
+
S
+
(RETURN AIR
ENTHALPY
SENSOR)
+
3
1
SR
2
GRAY/ORN
GRAY/RED
Economizer controls —
WIRE HARNESS
IN UNIT
LED
Outdoor Air Enthalpy Control (PNO HH57AC077) -
NOTES:
1. Remove factory-installed jumper across SR and + before connecting
wires from return air sensor.
2. Switches shown in high outdoor air enthalpy state. Terminals 2 and 3
close on low outdoor air enthalpy relative to indoor air enthalpy.
3. Remove sensor mounted on back of control and locate in outside air-
stream.
The enthalpy control (HH57AC077) is available as a
field-installed accessory to be used with the EconoMi$er2
damper system. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor is part of
the enthalpy control. (The separate field-installed
accessory return air enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) is
required for differential enthalpy control. See below.)
C06019
Fig. 49 - Outside and Return Air Enthalpy Sensor
Wiring
Locate the enthalpy control in the economizer hood.
Locate two GRA leads in the factory harness and connect
these leads to enthalpy control sensors 2 and 3. See Fig.
48. Connect the enthalpy control power input terminals to
economizer actuator power leads RED (connect to TR)
and BLK (connect to TR1).
To wire the return air enthalpy sensor, perform the
following:
1. Use a 2-conductor, 18 or 20 AWG, twisted pair cable
to connect the return air enthalpy sensor to the enthal-
py controller.
2. At the enthalpy control remove the factory-installed
resistor from the (SR) and (+) terminals.
LCTB
ECON
Enthalpy
Switch
3. Connect the field-supplied RED wire to (+) spade
connector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the
(SR+) terminal on the enthalpy controller. Connect
the BLK wire to (S) spade connector on the return air
enthalpy sensor and the (SR) terminal on the enthalpy
controller.
6
7
2
3
GRA
GRA
NOTE: The enthalpy control must be set to the “D”
setting for differential enthalpy control to work properly.
Factory Wiring Harness
C08218
The enthalpy control receives the indoor and return
enthalpy from the outdoor and return air enthalpy sensors
Fig. 48 - Enthalpy Switch (HH57AC077) Connections
and provides
a
dry contact switch input to the
The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set at the
enthalpy controller.
PremierLink controller. A closed contact indicates that
outside air is preferred to the return air. An open contact
indicates that the economizer should remain at minimum
position.
The enthalpy control receives the outdoor air enthalpy
from the outdoor air enthalpy sensor and provides a dry
contact switch input to the PremierLink controller. A
closed contact indicates that outside air is preferred to the
return air. An open contact indicates that the economizer
should remain at minimum position.
Indoor Air Quality (CO2 sensor) — The indoor air quality
sensor accessory monitors space carbon dioxide (CO2)
levels. This information is used to monitor IAQ levels.
Several types of sensors are available, for wall mounting
in the space or in return duct, with and without LCD
display, and in combination with space temperature
sensors. Sensors use infrared technology to measure the
levels of CO2 present in the space air.
Differential Enthalpy Control — Differential enthalpy
control is provided by sensing and comparing the outside
air and return air enthalpy conditions. Install the outdoor
air enthalpy control as described above. Add and install a
return air enthalpy sensor.
The CO2 sensors are all factory set for a range of 0 to
2000 ppm and a linear mA output of 4 to 20. Refer to the
instructions supplied with the CO2 sensor for electrical
Return Air Enthalpy Sensor — Mount the return-air
enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) in the return-air duct. The
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
requirements and terminal locations. See Fig. 50 for
typical CO2 sensor wiring schematic.
Refer to Form 33CS-58SI, PremierLink Installation,
Start-up, and Configuration Instructions, for detailed
configuration information
Outdoor Air Quality Sensor (PNO 33ZCSENCO2 plus
weatherproof enclosure) — The outdoor air CO2 sensor is
designed to monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) levels in the
outside ventilation air and interface with the ventilation
damper in an HVAC system. The OAQ sensor is packaged
with an outdoor cover. See Fig. 52. The outdoor air CO2
sensor must be located in the economizer outside air hood.
+ 0-10VDC
-
SIG COM (J4-6)
4-20mA (J4-5)
+
ALARM
NC
COM RELAY
}
NO CONTACTS
24 VAC
OR
24 VDC
H G
+
-
2 1
5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6
C07134
Fig. 50 - Indoor/Outdoor Air Quality (CO2) Sensor
(33ZCSENCO2) - Typical Wiring Diagram
COVER REMOVED
SIDE VIEW
To accurately monitor the quality of the air in the
conditioned air space, locate the sensor near a return-air
grille (if present) so it senses the concentration of CO2
leaving the space. The sensor should be mounted in a
location to avoid direct breath contact.
C07135
Fig. 52 - Outdoor Air Quality Sensor Cover
Wiring the Outdoor Air CO2 Sensor — A dedicated power
supply is required for this sensor. A two-wire cable is
required to wire the dedicated power supply for the sensor.
The two wires should be connected to the power supply
and terminals 1 and 2.
Do not mount the IAQ sensor in drafty areas such as near
supply ducts, open windows, fans, or over heat sources.
Allow at least 3 ft (0.9 m) between the sensor and any
corner. Avoid mounting the sensor where it is influenced
by the supply air; the sensor gives inaccurate readings if
the supply air is blown directly onto the sensor or if the
supply air does not have a chance to mix with the room air
before it is drawn into the return airstream.
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive
(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the
OAQ sensor. See Fig. 50. Connect the 4 to 20 mA
terminal to 48TC’s terminal TB1-11. Connect the SIG
COM terminal to 48TC’s terminal TB1-13. See Fig. 53.
Wiring the Indoor Air Quality Sensor —
OAQ Sensor/RH Sensor
For each sensor, use two 2-conductor 18 AWG (American
Wire Gage) twisted-pair cables (unshielded) to connect
the separate isolated 24 vac power source to the sensor
and to connect the sensor to the control board terminals.
TB1
13
PL
J5-2
SEN
TB1
11
COM
J5-3
24 VAC
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive
(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the
sensor. See Fig. 50. Connect the 4-20 mA terminal to
terminal TB1-9 and connect the SIG COM terminal to
terminal TB1-7. See Fig. 51.
C08275
Fig. 53 - Outdoor CO2 Sensor Connections
Refer to Form 33CS-58SI, PremierLink Installation,
Start-up, and Configuration Instructions, for detailed
configuration information.
IAQ Sensor
TB1
9
PL
J5-5
SEN
Smoke Detector/Fire Shutdown (FSD) — This function is
available only when PremierLink is configured for
(Space) Sensor Mode. The unit is factory-wired for
PremierLink FSD operation when PremierLink is
factory-installed.
TB1
7
COM
J5-6
24 VAC
C08274
Fig. 51 - Indoor CO2 Sensor (33ZCSENCO2)
Connections
On 48TC units equipped with factory-installed Smoke
Detector(s), the smoke detector controller implements the
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fan (Pressure) Switch (NO, close on rise in pressure)
unit shutdown through its NC contact set connected to the
unit’s LCTB input. The FSD function is initiated via the
smoke detector’s Alarm NO contact set. The PremierLink
communicates the smoke detector’s tripped status to the
CCN building control. See Fig. 23 for unit smoke detector
wiring.
LCTB
Thermostat
R
TB1
8
PL
J4-6
Alarm state is reset when the smoke detector alarm
condition is cleared and reset at the smoke detector in the
unit.
C08118
Fig. 55 - PremierLink Wiring Fan Pressure Switch
Connection
Filter Status Switch — This function is available only
when PremierLink is configured for (Space) Sensor Mode.
Remote Occupied Switch — The PremierLink control
permits a remote timeclock to override the control’s
on-board occupancy schedule and place the unit into
Occupied mode. This function may also provide a “Door
Switch” time delay function that will terminate cooling
and heating functions after a 2-20 minute delay.
PremierLink control can monitor return filter status in two
ways: By monitoring a field-supplied/installed filter
pressure switch or via supply fan runtime hours.
Using switch input: Install the dirty filter pressure switch
according to switch manufacturer’s instructions, to
measure pressure drop across the unit’s return filters.
Connect one side of the switch’s NO contact set to
LCTB’s THERMOSTAT-R terminal. Connect the other
side of the NO contact set to TB1-10. Setpoint for Dirty
Filter is set at the switch. See Fig. 54.
Connect one side of the NO contact set on the timeclock
to LCTB’s THERMOSTAT-R terminal. Connect the other
side of the timeclock contact to the unit’s TB1-2 terminal.
LCTB
Remote Occupied
Thermostat
R
Filter Switch (NO, close on rising pressure (high drop))
Time Clock
TB1
2
PL
J4-12
LCTB
Thermostat
C08214
R
Fig. 56 - PremierLink Wiring Remote Occupied
TB1
10
PL
J4-4
Refer to Form 33CS-58SI for additional information on
configuring the PremierLink control for Door Switch
timer function.
C08216
Fig. 54 - PremierLink Filter Switch Connection
Power Exhaust (output) - Connect the accessory Power
Exhaust contactor coils(s) per Fig. 57.
When the filter switch’s NO contact set closes as filter
pressure drop increases (indicating dirt-laden filters), the
input signal to PremierLink causes the filter status point to
read “DIRTY”.
Power Exhaust
TB1
PL
15
J8-3
PEC
TAN
LCTB
THERMOSTAT
C
Using Filter Timer Hours: Refer to Form 33CS-58SI for
instructions on using the PremierLink Configuration
screens and on unit alarm sequence.
GRA
C08120
Supply Fan Status Switch — The PremierLink control can
Fig. 57 - PremierLink Power Exhaust Output
Connection
monitor
supply
fan
operation
through
a
field-supplied/installed differential pressure switch. This
sequence will prevent (or interrupt) operation of unit
cooling, heating and economizer functions until the
pressure switch contacts are closed indicating proper
supply fan operation.
Space Relative Humidity Sensor — The RH sensor is not
used with 48TC models at this time.
CCN Communication Bus — The PremierLink controller
connects to the bus in a daisy chain arrangement.
Negative pins on each component must be connected to
respective negative pins, and likewise, positive pins on
each component must be connected to respective positive
pins. The controller signal pins must be wired to the signal
ground pins. Wiring connections for CCN must be made
at the 3-pin plug.
Install the differential pressure switch in the supply fan
section according to switch manufacturer’s instructions.
Arrange the switch contact to be open on no flow and to
close as pressure rises indicating fan operation.
Connect one side of the switch’s NO contact set to
LCTB’s THERMOSTAT-R terminal. Connect the other
side of the NO contact set to TB1-8. Setpoint for Supply
Fan Status is set at the switch. See Fig. 55.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RTU-MP CONTROL SYSTEM
At any baud (9600, 19200, 38400 baud), the number of
controllers is limited to 239 devices maximum. Bus length
may not exceed 4000 ft, with no more than 60 total
devices on any 1000-ft section. Optically isolated RS-485
repeaters are required every 1000 ft.
Connect the CCN (+) lead (typically RED) to the unit s
TB1-12 terminal. Connect the CCN (ground) lead
(typically WHT) to the unit’s TB1-14 terminal. Connect
the CCN (-) lead (typically BLK) to the unit’s TB1-16
terminal. See Fig. 58.
NOTE: Carrier device default is 9600 band.
CCN Bus
TB1
12
COMMUNICATION BUS WIRE SPECIFICATIONS —
The CCN Communication Bus wiring is field-supplied
and field-installed. It consists of shielded 3-conductor
cable with drain (ground) wire. The cable selected must
be identical to the CCN Communication Bus wire used for
the entire network.
PL
J2-1
+ (RED)
TB1
14
GND (WHT)
J2-2
TB1
16
– (BLK)
J2-3
See Table 19 for recommended cable.
C08276
Fig. 58 - PremierLink CCN Bus Connections
Table 19 – Recommended Cables
MANUFACTURER
Alpha
CABLE PART NO.
2413 or 5463
A22503
American
Belden
Columbia
The RTU-MP controller, see Fig. 59, provides expanded
stand-alone operation of the HVAC system plus
connection and control through communication with
several Building Automation Systems (BAS) through
popular third-party network systems. The available
network systems are BACnet MP/TP, Modbus and
Johnson J2. Communication with LonWorks is also
possible by adding an accessory interface card to the
RTU-MP. Selection of the communication protocol and
baud rate are made at on-board DIP switches.
8772
02525
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be at least 20
AWG, stranded, and tinned copper. Individual conductors
must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or
polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield
and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or
Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of
-20 C to 60 C is required. Do not run communication wire
in the same conduit as or next to any AC voltage wiring.
Carrier’s diagnostic display tools BACviewer6 Handheld
and Virtual BACview (loaded on a portable PC) must be
used with the RTU-MP controller. Connection to the
RTU-MP board is at the J12 access port, see Fig. 59.
The communication bus shields must be tied together at
each system element. If the communication bus is entirely
within one building, the resulting continuous shield must
be connected to ground at only one single point. If the
communication bus cable exits from one building and
enters another building, the shields must be connected to
the grounds at a lightning suppressor in each building (one
point only).
The RTU-MP control is factory-mounted in the 48TC
unit’s main control box, to the left of the LCTB. See Fig.
60. Factory wiring is completed through harnesses
connected to the LCTB. Field connections for RTU-MP
sensors will be made at the Phoenix connectors on the
RTU-MP board. The factory-installed RTU-MP control
includes the supply-air temperature (SAT) sensor. The
outdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is included in the
FIOP/accessory EconoMi$er 2 package.
Connecting CCN bus:
NOTE: When connecting the communication bus cable,
a
color code system for the entire network is
recommended to simplify installation and checkout. See
Table 20 for the recommended color code.
Refer to Table 21, RTU-MP Controller Inputs and Outputs
for locations of all connections to the RTU-MP board.
Table 20 – Color Code Recommendations
CCN BUS WIRE
COLOR
CCN PLUG PIN
NUMBER
SIGNAL TYPE
+
Ground
---
Red
White
Black
1
2
3
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C07129
Fig. 59 - RTU-MP Multi-Protocol Control Board
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 21 – RTU-MP Controller Inputs and Outputs
BACnet OBJECT
TYPE OF I/O
NAME
CONNECTION PIN
NUMBERS
POINT NAME
INPUTS
Space Temperature Sensor
Supply Air Temperature
Local Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Space Temperature Offset Pot
Indoor Air Quality
Outdoor Air Quality
Safety Chain Feedback
Compressor Safety
sptsens
sat
oatsens
sptopot
iaq
oaq
safety
compstat
firedown
enthalpy
humstat
AI (10K Thermistor)
AI (10K Thermistor)
AI (10K Thermistor)
AI (100K Potentiometer)
A I (4 --- 20 m a)
J 20 --- 1, 2
J 2 --- 1, 2
J 2 --- 3, 4
J 20 --- 3
J 4 --- 2, 3
J 4 --- 5, 6
J 1 --- 9
A I (4 --- 20 m a)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
J 1 --- 2
Fire Shutdown
Enthalpy Switch
Humidistat Input Status
J 1 --- 10
J 2 --- 6, 7
J 5 --- 7, 8
CONFIGURABLE INPUTS*
Space Relative Humidity
Outside Air Relative Humidity
Supply Fan Status
Filter Status
Remote Occupancy Input
sprh
oarh
fanstat
filtstat
remocc
OUTPUTS
econocmd
A I (4 --- 20 m a)
A I (4 --- 20 m a)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
DI (24 VAC)
J4---2,3 or J4---5,6
J 5 --- 1, 2 or J 5 --- 3, 4 or
J5 5,6 or J5---7,8
Economizer Commanded Position
Supply Fan Relay State
4 --- 20m a
J 2 --- 5
J 1 --- 4
J 1 --- 8
J 1 --- 7
J 1 --- 6
J 1 --- 5
J 11 --- 3
J 11 --- 7, 8
sf
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC , 1A)
DO Relay (24VAC, 1A)
Compressor 1 Relay State
Compressor 2 Relay State
Heat Stage 1 Relay State
Heat Stage 2 Relay State
Power Exhaust Relay State
Dehumidification Relay State
comp_1
comp_2
heat_1
heat_2
aux_2
humizer
LEGEND
AI --- A n a lo g In p u t
AO --- A n a lo g O u t p u t
DI --- D iscr e t e In p u t
DO --- Discrete Output
*
These inputs (if installed) take the place of the default input on the specific channel according to schematic.
Pa r a lle l p in s J 5 --- 1 = J 2 --- 6 , J 5 --- 3 = J 1 --- 1 0 , J 5 --- 5 = J 1 --- 2 a r e u se d f o r f ie ld --- in st a lla t io n .
Refer to the input configuration and accessory sections for more detail.
NOTE: Refer to Form 48-50H-T-2T for complete
configuration of RTU-MP, operating sequences and
troubleshooting information. Refer to RTU-MP 3rd Party
Integration Guide for details on configuration and
troubleshooting of connected networks. Have a copy of
these manuals available at unit start-up.
Use two field-supplied, self-drilling screws to secure the
sensor probe in a horizontal orientation. See Fig. 41.
Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor - The OAT is
factory-mounted in the EconoMi$er
2
(FIOP or
accessory). It is a nominal 10k ohm thermistor attached to
an eyelet mounting ring. See Table 15 for
temperature-resistance characteristic.
The RTU-MP controller requires the use of a Carrier
space sensor. A standard thermostat cannot be used with
the RTU-MP system.
EconoMi$er 2 - The RTU-MP control is used with
EconoMi$er2 (option or accessory) for outdoor air
management. The damper position is controlled directly
by the RTU-MP control; EconoMi$er 2 has no internal
logic device.
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor
-
On
FIOP-equipped 48TC unit, the unit is supplied with a
supply-air temperature (SAT) sensor (33ZCSENSAT).
This sensor is a tubular probe type, approx 6-inches (12.7
mm) in length. It is a nominal 10-k ohm thermistor. See
Table 15 for temperature-resistance characteristic.
Outdoor air management functions can be enhanced with
field-installation of these accessory control devices:
Enthalpy control (outdoor air or differential sensors)
Space CO2 sensor
Outdoor air CO2 sensor
The SAT is factory-wired. The SAT probe is wire-tied to
the supply-air opening (on the horizontal opening end) in
its shipping position. Remove the sensor for installation.
Re-position the sensor in the flange of the supply-air
opening or in the supply air duct (as required by local
codes). Drill or punch a 1/2-in. hole in the flange or duct.
Field Connections - Field connections for accessory
sensors and input devices are made the RTU-MP, at plugs
J1, J2, J4, J5, J11 and J20. All field control wiring that
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
connects to the RTU-MP must be routed through the
raceway built into the corner post as shown in Fig. 34.
The raceway provides the UL required clearance between
high- and low-voltage wiring. Pass the control wires
through the hole provided in the corner post, then feed the
wires thorough the raceway to the RTU-MP. Connect to
the wires to the removable Phoenix connectors and then
reconnect the connectors to the board.
terminal (BRN) to J20
or BLK) to J20-3.
-2. Connect the SET terminal (STO
BRN (COM)
BLK (STO)
BLU (SPT)
SENSOR
WIRING
Space Temperature (SPT) Sensors
OR
SET SEN
A field-supplied Carrier space temperature sensor is
required with the RTU-MP to monitor space temperature.
There are 3 sensors available for this application:
OPB COM- PWR+
S 33ZCT55SPT, space temperature sensor with override
button
S 33ZCT56SPT, space temperature sensor with override
button and setpoint adjustment
POWER
WIRING
24 VAC
NOTE: Must use a separate isolated transformer.
S 33ZCT59SPT, space temperature sensor with LCD
(liquid crystal display) screen, override button, and
setpoint adjustment
Use 20 gauge wire to connect the sensor to the controller.
The wire is suitable for distances of up to 500 ft. Use a
three-conductor shielded cable for the sensor and setpoint
adjustment connections. If the setpoint adjustment
(slidebar) is not required, then an unshielded, 18 or 20
gauge, two-conductor, twisted pair cable may be used.
C07132
Fig. 63 - Space Temperature Sensor Typical Wiring
(33ZCT59SPT)
Economizer controls —
Connect T-55 - See Fig. 43 for typical T-55 internal
connections. Connect the T-55 SEN terminals to
RTU-MP J20-1 and J20-2. See Fig. 61.
Outdoor Air Enthalpy Control (PNO HH57AC077) -
The enthalpy control (HH57AC077) is available as a
field-installed accessory to be used with the EconoMi$er2
damper system. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor is part of
the enthalpy control. (The separate field-installed
accessory return air enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) is
required for differential enthalpy control. See below.)
J20-1
SEN
J20-2
SEN
Locate the enthalpy control in the economizer hood.
Locate two GRA leads in the factory harness and connect
these leads to enthalpy control sensors 2 and 3. See Fig.
48. Connect the enthalpy control power input terminals to
economizer actuator power leads RED (connect to TR)
and BLK (connect to TR1).
C08460
Fig. 61 - RTU-MP T-55 Sensor Connections
Connect T-56 See Fig. 45 for T-56 internal
-
connections. Install a jumper between SEN and SET
terminals as illustrated. Connect T-56 terminals to
RTU-MP J20-1, J20-2 and J20-3 per Fig. 62.
The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set at the
enthalpy controller.
SEN
J20-1
The enthalpy control receives the outdoor air enthalpy
from the outdoor air enthalpy sensor and provides a dry
contact switch input to the RTU-MP controller. A closed
contact indicates that outside air is preferred to the return
air. An open contact indicates that the economizer should
remain at minimum position.
SEN
J20-2
Jumper
SET
SET
Differential Enthalpy Control — Differential enthalpy
control is provided by sensing and comparing the outside
air and return air enthalpy conditions. Install the outdoor
air enthalpy control as described above. Add and install a
return air enthalpy sensor.
J20-3
C08461
Fig. 62 - RTU-MP T-56 Sensor Connections
Connect T-59 - The T-59 space sensor requires a
separate, isolated power supply of 24 VAC. See Fig. 61
for internal connections at the T-59. Connect the SEN
terminal (BLU) to RTU-MP J20-1. Connect the COM
Return Air Enthalpy Sensor — Mount the return-air
enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) in the return-air duct. The
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
return air sensor is wired to the enthalpy controller
(HH57AC077). See Fig. 49.
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive
(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the
sensor. See Fig. 50. Connect the 4-20 mA terminal to
terminal TB1-9 and connect the SIG COM terminal to
terminal TB1-7. See Fig. 64.
To wire the return air enthalpy sensor, perform the
following:
1. Use a 2-conductor, 18 or 20 AWG, twisted pair cable
to connect the return air enthalpy sensor to the enthal-
py controller.
2. At the enthalpy control remove the factory-installed
resistor from the (SR) and (+) terminals.
IAQ Sensor
J4-2
SEN
COM
J4-3
3. Connect the field-supplied RED wire to (+) spade
connector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the
(SR+) terminal on the enthalpy controller. Connect
the BLK wire to (S) spade connector on the return air
enthalpy sensor and the (SR) terminal on the enthalpy
controller.
24 VAC
C08462
Fig. 64 - RTU-MP / Indoor CO2 Sensor
(33ZCSENCO2) Connections
Outdoor Air Quality Sensor (PNO 33ZCSENCO2 plus
weatherproof enclosure) — The outdoor air CO2 sensor is
designed to monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) levels in the
outside ventilation air and interface with the ventilation
damper in an HVAC system. The OAQ sensor is packaged
with an outdoor cover. See Fig. 52. The outdoor air CO2
sensor must be located in the economizer outside air hood.
NOTE: The enthalpy control must be set to the “D”
setting for differential enthalpy control to work properly.
The enthalpy control receives the indoor and return
enthalpy from the outdoor and return air enthalpy sensors
and provides a dry contact switch input to the RTU-MP
controller. A closed contact indicates that outside air is
preferred to the return air. An open contact indicates that
the economizer should remain at minimum position.
Wiring the Outdoor Air CO2 Sensor — A dedicated power
supply is required for this sensor. A two-wire cable is
required to wire the dedicated power supply for the sensor.
The two wires should be connected to the power supply
and terminals 1 and 2.
Indoor Air Quality (CO2 sensor) — The indoor air quality
sensor accessory monitors space carbon dioxide (CO2)
levels. This information is used to monitor IAQ levels.
Several types of sensors are available, for wall mounting
in the space or in return duct, with and without LCD
display, and in combination with space temperature
sensors. Sensors use infrared technology to measure the
levels of CO2 present in the space air.
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive
(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the
OAQ sensor. See Fig. 50. Connect the 4 to 20 mA
terminal to 48TC’s terminal TB1-11. Connect the SIG
COM terminal to 48TC’s terminal TB1-13. See Fig. 65.
The CO2 sensors are all factory set for a range of 0 to
2000 ppm and a linear mA output of 4 to 20. Refer to the
instructions supplied with the CO2 sensor for electrical
requirements and terminal locations. See Fig. 50 for
typical CO2 sensor wiring schematic.
OAQ Sensor/RH Sensor
J4-5
J4-6
SEN
To accurately monitor the quality of the air in the
conditioned air space, locate the sensor near a return-air
grille (if present) so it senses the concentration of CO2
leaving the space. The sensor should be mounted in a
location to avoid direct breath contact.
COM
24 VAC
C08463
Fig. 65 - RTU-MP / Outdoor CO2 Sensor
(33ZCSENCO2) Connections
Do not mount the IAQ sensor in drafty areas such as near
supply ducts, open windows, fans, or over heat sources.
Allow at least 3 ft (0.9 m) between the sensor and any
corner. Avoid mounting the sensor where it is influenced
by the supply air; the sensor gives inaccurate readings if
the supply air is blown directly onto the sensor or if the
supply air does not have a chance to mix with the room air
before it is drawn into the return airstream.
On 48TC units equipped with factory-installed Smoke
Detector(s), the smoke detector controller implements the
unit shutdown through its NC contact set connected to the
unit’s LCTB input. The FSD function is initiated via the
smoke detector’s Alarm NO contact set. The PremierLink
communicates the smoke detector’s tripped status to the
CCN building control. See Fig. 23 for unit smoke detector
wiring.
Wiring the Indoor Air Quality Sensor —
The
Fire
Shutdown
Switch
configuration,
identifies the
For each sensor, use two 2-conductor 18 AWG (American
Wire Gage) twisted-pair cables (unshielded) to connect
the separate isolated 24 vac power source to the sensor
and to connect the sensor to the control board terminals.
MENU→Config→Inputs→input 5,
normally open status of this input when there is no fire
alarm.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm state is reset when the smoke detector alarm
condition is cleared and reset at the smoke detector in the
unit.
Power Exhaust (output)
Connect the accessory Power Exhaust contactor coil(s) per
Fig. 66.
Connecting Discrete Inputs
Filter Status
Power Exhaust
The filter status accessory is a field-installed accessory.
This accessory detects plugged filters. When installing
this accessory, the unit must be configured for filter status
by setting MENU→Config→Inputs→input 3, 5, 8, or 9
to Filter Status and normally open (N/O) or normally
closed (N/C). Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of
installation. Refer to Fig. 59 and Fig. 60 for wire
terminations at J5.
J11-3
PEC
TAN
LCTB
THERMOSTAT
C
GRA
C08464
Fig. 66 - RTU-MP Power Exhaust Connections
Space Relative Humidity Sensor - The RH sensor is not
used with 48TC models at this time.
Fan Status
The fan status accessory is a field-installed accessory.
This accessory detects when the indoor fan is blowing air.
When installing this accessory, the unit must be
Communication Wiring -- Protocols
General
configured
for
fan
status
by
setting
Protocols are the communication languages spoken by
control devices. The main purpose of a protocol is to
communicate information in the most efficient method
possible. Different protocols exist to provide different
kinds of information for different applications. In the BAS
application, many different protocols are used, depending
on manufacturer. Protocols do not change the function of
a controller; just make the front end user different.
The RTU-MP can be set to communicate on four different
protocols: BACnet, Modbus, N2, and LonWorks. Switch 3
(SW3) on the board is used to set protocol and baud rate.
Switches 1 and 2 (SW1 and SW2) are used to set the
board’s network address. See Fig 67 for the switch setting
per protocol. The 3rd party connection to the RTU-MP is
through plug J19. Refer to the RTU-MP 3rd Party
Integration Guide for more detailed information on
protocols, 3rd party wiring, and networking.
MENU→Config→Inputs→input 3, 5, 8, or 9 to Fan
Status and normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C).
Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of installation. Refer
to Fig. 59 and Fig. 60 for wire terminations at J5.
Remote Occupancy
The remote occupancy accessory is a field-installed
accessory. This accessory overrides the unoccupied mode
and puts the unit in occupied mode. When installing this
accessory, the unit must be configured for remote
occupancy by setting MENU→Config→Inputs→input 3,
5, 8, or 9 to Remote Occupancy and normally open (N/O)
or normally closed (N/C).
Also set MENU→Schedules→occupancy source to DI
on/off. Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of
installation. Refer to Fig. 59 and Table 21 for wire
terminations at J5.
NOTE: Power must be cycled after changing the SW1-3
switch settings.
SW3 Protocol Selection
DS6 DS5
OFF OFF
PROTOCOL
BACnet MS/TP
(Master)
DS8
DS7
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
Unused
OFF
ON
OFF
Select Baud Select Baud
Modbus
(Slave)
Unused
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Select Baud Select Baud
N2
Unused
Unused
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
(Slave)
LonWorks
OFF
NOTE:
DS = Dip Switch
BACnet MS/TP SW3 example shown
Baud Rate Selections
BAUD RATE
9600
DS2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DS1
OFF
OFF
ON
19,200
38,400
76,800
ON
C07166
Fig. 67 - RTU-MP SW3 Dip Switch Settings
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BACnet MS/TP
Local Access
6
BACnet Master Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP) is used for
BACview Handheld
communicating BACnet over
a
sub-network of
The BACview6 is a keypad/display interface used to
connect to the RTU-MP to access the control information,
read sensor values, and test the RTU, see Fig. 68. This is
an accessory interface that does not come with the MP
controller and can only be used at the unit. Connect the
BACview6 to the RTU-MP’s J12 local access port. There
are 2 password protected levels in the display (User and
Admin). The user password is defaulted to 0000 but can
be changed. The Admin password is 1111 and cannot be
changed. There is a 10 minute auto logout if a screen is
left idle. See Form 48-50H-T-2T, Appendix A for
navigation and screen content.
BACnet-only controllers. This is the default Carrier
communications protocol. Each RTU-MP module acts as
an MS/TP Master. The speed of an MS/TP network can
range from 9600 to 76.8K baud. Physical Addresses can
be set from 01 to 99.
Modbus
The RTU-MP module can speak the Modicon Modbus
RTU Protocol as described in the Modicon Modbus
Protocol Reference Guide, PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J. The
speed of a Modbus network can range from 9600 to 76.8K
baud. Physical Addresses can be set from 01 to 99.
Virtual BACview
Johnson N2
Virtual BACview is a freeware computer program that
functions as the BACview6 Handheld. The USB Link
interface (USB-L) is required to connect a computer to
the RTU-MP board. The link cable connects a USB port
to the J12 local access port. This program functions and
operates identical to the handheld.
N2 is not a standard protocol, but one that was created by
Johnson Controls, Inc. that has been made open and
available to the public. The speed of N2 network is
limited to only 9600 baud. Physical Addresses can be set
from 01 to 99.
LonWorks
RTU--MP Troubleshooting
Communication LEDs
LonWorks is an open protocol that requires the use of
Echelon’s Neuron microprocessor to encode and decode
the LonWorks packets. In order to reduce the cost of
adding that hardware on every module, a separate
LonWorks Option Card (LON-OC) was designed to
connect to the RTU-MP.
The LEDs indicate if the controller is speaking to the
devices on the network. The LEDs should reflect
communication traffic based on the baud rate set. The
higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs will appear.
This accessory card is needed for LonWorks and has to be
ordered and connected using the ribbon cable to plug J15.
The RTU-MP’s baud rate must be set to 38.4k to
communicate with the LON-OC. The address switches
(SW1 & SW2) are not used with LonWorks.
C07170
Fig. 68 - BACview6 Handheld Connections
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 22 – LEDs
The LEDs on the RTU-MP show the status of certain functions
If this LED is on...
Status is...
Power
Rx
Tx
The RTU MP has power
The RTU MP is receiving data from the network segment
The RTU MP is transmitting data over the network segment
The digital output is active
DO#
The Run and Error LEDs indicate control module and network status
If Run LED shows...
2 flashes per second
And Error LED shows...
Off
Status is...
Normal
2 flashes,
Five minute auto---restart delay after sys-
tem error
Control module has just been
formatted
Two or more devices on this network
have the same ARC156 network address
Exec halted after frequent system errors
or control programs halted
Exec start---up aborted, Boot is running
Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is
running
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
alternating with Run LED
3 flashes,
then off
4 flashes,
then pause
2 flashes per second
5 flashes per second
5 flashes per second
On
On
Off
7 flashes per second, alternating with
Run LED
14 flashes per second,
alternating with Run LED
Ten second recovery period after brown-
out
7 flashes per second
14 flashes per second
Brownout
Failure. Try the following solutions:
S
S
S
S
Turn the RTU---MP off, then on.
Form at the R TU --- M P.
Download memory to the RTU---MP.
Replace the RTU---MP.
On
On
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 23 – Troubleshooting Alarms
BACnet
OBJECT
NAME
ACTION TAKEN BY
CONTROL
RESET
METHOD
POINT NAME
Safety Chain Alarm
Fire Shutdown Alarm
PROBABLE CAUSE
Alarm Generated
Immediate
safety_chain
fire_alarm
spt_alarm
sat_alarm
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Over load Indoor Fan or Electric Heater overheat.
Shutdown
Alarm Generated
Immediate
Shutdown
Alarm Generated
Immediate
Shutdown
Alarm Generated
Immediate
Shutdown
Smoke detected by smoke detector or configura-
tion incorrect
Space Temp Sensor
Failure
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by
wiring error or loose connection.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by
wiring error or loose connection.
SAT Sensor Alarm
The space temperature has risen above the cool
setpoint by more than the desired amount.
The space temperature has dropped below the
heat setpoint by more than the desired amount.
SAT is greater then 160 degrees for more than 5
minutes.
High Space Temp Alarm
Low Space Temp Alarm
High Supply Air Temp
Low Supply Air Temp
spt_hi
spt_lo
sat_hi
sat_lo
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
The supply air temperature is below 35_F for
more than 5 minutes.
Alarm Generated
Immediately
Tripped Circuit Breaker, Broken belt, Bad indoor
fan motor, Configuration incorrect, Bad fan status
switch.
Supply Fan Failed to
Start
sf_fail
Automatic
Automatic
disable Operation
Alarm Generated
Ramp down
Supply Fan in Hand
sf_hand
Bad Fan Status Switch, Configuration incorrect.
Operations
Compressor Safety
Alarm
dx_compstat
slide_alarm
Alarm Generated
Automatic
Automatic
Compressor would not start.
Alarm Generated
Offset set to zero
STO sensor is open or shorted for more then 5
seconds.
Setpoint Slider Alarm
Automatic/
reset timer
when config-
ured with or
without
Dirty Filter, supply fan run time exceeded, filter
switch configuration wrong.
Dirty Filter Alarm
filter
Alarm Generated
switch
Alarm Generated
Disable misconfi-
gured switch
More than one binary input is configured for the
same purpose. More then one discrete input is
configured to provide the same function.
Switch Configuration
Alarm
Configure
correctly
sw_cfg_alarm
an_cfg_alarm
oat_alarm
functions
Alarm Generated
Disable 4 selectable
analog inputs
Alarm Generated
Economizer and Low
ambient DX cooling
lockout disabled.
Alarm Generated
Dehumidification
disabled
Misconfigured Analog In-
put
Configure
correctly
More then one analog input is configured to pro-
vide the same function.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by
wiring error or loose connection.
OAT Sensor Alarm
Automatic
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad
wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
Space RH Sensor Alarm
sprh_alarm
oarh_alarm
Automatic
Automatic
Outdoor RH Sensor
Alarm
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad
wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
IRH is greater then 70% for more then 10 min-
utes.
Alarm Generated
High Space Humidity
Low Space Humidity
sprh_hi
sprh_lo
Alarm Generated
Automatic
Automatic
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Disables IAQ
Operation Econo-
mizer moves to mini-
mum position
IRH is less then 35% for more then 10 minutes.
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad
wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
IAQ Sensor Alarm
iaq_alarm
Automatic
Alarm Generated Set
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad
wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
OAQ Sensor Alarm
oaq_alarm
co2_hi
Automatic
Automatic
OAQ to 400
High Carbon Dioxide
Level
Supply Fan Runtime
Alarm
Compressor 1 Runtime
Alarm
Compressor 2 Runtime
Alarm
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
Alarm Generated
CO2 reading is above 1200ppm.
clear the
timer
clear the
timer
clear the
timer
sf_rntm
Supply fan run time exceeded user defined limit.
Compressor run time limit is exceeded.
Compressor run time limit is exceeded.
dx1_rntm
dx2_rntm
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Misconfigured Analog Input
Alarms
This occurs if more than one analog input (inputs 1 & 2)
is configured for the same sensor. When this happens the
two inputs will be disabled as inputs. This alarm will
automatically be cleared when configuration is corrected.
An example of this would be: Input 1 = IAQ Sensor, input
2 = IAQ Sensor; the alarm would be active, unit would
run, but the IAQ Sensor (inputs 1 & 2) will be interpreted
as “No Function.”
Alarms can be checked through the network and/or the
local access. All the alarms are listed in Table 23 with
name, object name, action taken by control, reset method,
and probable cause. There are help screens for each alarm
on the local access display and listed in Form
48-50H-T-2T, Appendix A: Help Screens. Some alarms
are explained in detail below.
Safety Chain Alarm
Third Party Networking
This alarm occurs immediately if the supply-fan internal
overload trips or if an electric-heat limit switch trips. The
Unit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode will
be Disable. When this happens LCTB (R terminal) will
not have 24 VAC, but the RTU-MP board will still be
powered. All unit operations stop immediately and will
not restart until the alarm automatically clears. There are
no configurations for this alarm; it is all based on internal
wiring. This alarm will never occur if Fire Shutdown
Alarm is active.
Third
party
communication
and
networking
troubleshooting should be done by or with assistance from
the front end 3rd party technician. A Module Status
Report (Modstat) can be run from the BACview6, see
Table 24 to perform. This lists information about the
board status and networking state. For basic
troubleshooting, see Table 25. Refer to the RTU-MP 3rd
Party Integration Guide for additional information.
BACnet MS/TP
Fire Shutdown Alarm
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to
speak the BACnet MS/TP protocol. The protocol of
the controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6).
The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstat
of the controller through the BACview. Hit the “FN”
key and the ’.’ key at the same time to pull up a
Modstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is
a section entitled “Network Communications.” The
active protocol and baud rate will be shown in this
section.
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for the
same baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is set
via SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also
be verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat.
(See Fig. 67.)
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2-wire
EIA-485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-
figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same
communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1
stop bit).
5. Verify that the controller has a unique MAC address
on the MS/TP bus. The controller’s MS/TP MAC ad-
dress is set by its rotary address switches.
6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-
troller.
7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper
BACnet objects in the controller. Download the latest
points list for the controller to verify.
8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the
proper MS/TP MAC address of our controller.
This alarm occurs immediately when the smoke detector
senses smoke. The Unit Status will be Shutdown and the
System Mode will be Disable. All unit operations stop
immediately and will not restart until the alarm
automatically clears. If there is not a smoke detector
installed or the smoke detector did not trip, check input
configurations.
Space Temp Sensor Failure
This alarm occurs if the space sensor wired to the
RTU-MP is disconnected or shorted for more then 10
seconds. When this occurs the Unit Status will be
Shutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor,
sensor connections, wiring, board connection, and
configurations should be checked for faults or errors.
Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.
SAT Sensor Alarm
This alarm occurs immediately when the supply air
temperature sensor wired to the RTU-MP is disconnected
or shorted. When this occurs the Unit Status will be
Shutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor,
sensor connections, wiring, board connection, and
configurations should be checked for faults or errors.
Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.
Switch Configuration Alarm
This occurs if more than one binary input (inputs 3, 5, 8,
and 9) is configured for the same function. When this
happens the two inputs (or more) configured wrong will
be disabled as an inputs. This alarm will automatically be
cleared when configuration is corrected.
An example of this would be: Input 3 = Compressor
Safety, input 5 = Fan Status, input 8 = Fan Status, and
input 9 = Humidistat; the alarm would be active, unit
would run, compressor safety and humidistat would
function normally, and Fan Status (inputs 5 & 8) will be
interpreted as “No Function.”
9. Present the BAS company with a copy of our control-
ler’s BACnet PICS so that they know which BACnet
commands are supported. See below.
10. In certain situations, it may be necessary to tweak the
MS/TP Protocol timing settings through the BAC-
view6. There are two settings that may be tweaked:
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S Max Masters: Defines the highest MS/TP Master MAC
address on this MS/TP network. For example, if there are
3 master nodes on an MS/TP network, and their MAC
addresses are 1, 8, and 16, then Max Masters would be set
to 16 (since this is the highest MS/TP MAC address on
the network). This property optimizes MS/TP network
communications by preventing token passes and “poll for
master” requests to non-existent Master nodes (i.e., in
the above example, MAC address 16 would know to pass
the token back to MAC address 1 instead of counting up
to MAC address 127). Each MS/TP master node on the
network must have their Max Masters set to this same
value. The default is 127.
Device Instance: 0160001
1 PRGs loaded. 1 PRGs running.
Module status:
Firmware sections validated in flash memory
============================================
Boot16-H
- v2.06:001 Jun 19 2007
- v2.09:050 Jun 26 2007
RTU-MP DRIVER
Reset counters:
11 Power failures
0 Brownouts
18 Commanded warm boots
22 Commanded cold boots
0 System errors
0 Watchdog timeouts
System error message history:
Warning message history:
Type Specific
Information message history:
POWERUP: BACnet reinitialize warmstart
Menu file not found.
06/29/07 10:49:40
06/29/07 10:48:35
ARC156 reconfigurations during the last hour (cleared upon reset):
Total ....................... 0
Initiated by this node ...... 0
Core board hardware:
Type=147, board=34, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N 21A740188N
RAM: 1024 kBytes;
FLASH: 1024 kBytes, type = 3
Base board hardware:
Type=147, board=71, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N RMP750037N
Largest free heap space = 65536.
Database size = 742082 , used = 352162, free = 389920.
Raw physical switches: 0x01280000
Module Communications:
Network Protocol=BACnet MSTP Master
Network Baud Rate=9600 bps
C07195
Fig. 69 - Module Status Report (Modstat) Example
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 24 – Manufacture Date
When troubleshooting, you may need to know a control module’s manufacture date
Obtain the manufacture date from
a...
Notes
6
Module status report (modstat)
To obtain a modstat with BACview :
1. Press Function (FN) key and hold.
2. Then press period (.)
3. Release both buttons.
The report shows the date under Main board hardware.
Sticker on the back of the main control The serial numbers are unique and contain embedded information:
module board
”Serial No: RMPYMxxxxN”
(Bar Coded & Typed Number)
“RMP”
“YM”
---
---
These first three digits are unique to RTU---MP and are used as an identifier.
These two digits identify the last digit of the year and month (in hex, A=10/Oct)
of manufacture. ”74” would represent a date of manufacture of ”April 2007”.
These four digits represent the sequential number of units produced for a given
product for the mentioned manufacturing time period.
This final digit represents the decade and toggles between ”N” and ”M” every
ten years.
“xxxx”
---
---
“N”
Table 25 – Basic Protocol Troubleshooting
Problem
No communication with 3rd
party vendor
Possible cause
Incorrect settings on SW1, SW2 and SW3
Corrective action
Verify and correct switch settings. Cycle
power to RTU---MP after changing switch
settings.
RS485 Port has no voltage output
(check with RTU---MP disconnected from RS485 commu-
nication bus)
Verify RTU---MP has correct power supply
Possible bad driver on board.
Bacnet @ 9600/19.2K --- .01 to .045vdc
Check RS485 bus for external before re-
connecting to the bus
Bacnet @ 38.4K --- .06 to .09vdc
Bacnet @ 76.8K --- .1vdc
Voltage, shorts or grounding
before reconnecting to the bus
Modbus @ 9600 --- 76.8K --- .124vdc
N2 @ 9600 --- .124vdc
Verify devices are daisy chained and repeaters and bias
terminators are correctly installed
Check 3rd party vendor RS485 commu-
nication wiring guidelines and trouble-
shooting procedures
S MaxInfo Frames: This property defines the maximum
number of responses that will be sent when our controller
gets the token. A valid number is any positive integer.
The default is 10 and should be ideal for the majority of
applications. In cases where the controller is the target of
many requests, this number could be increased as high as
100 or 200.
NOTE: MS/TP networks can be comprised of both
Master and Slave nodes. Valid MAC addresses for Master
nodes are 0 - 127 and valid addresses for Slave nodes are
0 - 254.
Modbus
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to
speak the Modbus RTU protocol. The protocol of the
controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6).
The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstat
of the controller through the BACview. Hit the ”FN”
key and the ’.’ key at the same time to pull up a
Modstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is
a section entitled “Network Communications.” The
active protocol and baud rate will be shown in this
section.
NOTE: See RTU-MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (or
alternatively Form 48-50H-T-1T Appendix) for Protocol
Maps.
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for the
same baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is set
via SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also
be verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat
(see above).
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2-wire
EIA-485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-
figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same
communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1
stop bit).
5. Verify that the controller has a unique Modbus slave
address. The controller’s Modbus slave address is set
by its rotary address switches.
Table 26 – Modbus Exception Codes that May be
Returned From This Controller
CODE
NAME
MEANING
The Modbus function code used
in the query is not supported by
the controller.
01
Illegal Function
The register address used in the
query is not supported by the
controller.
02
04
Illegal Data Address
Slave Device Failure
The Modbus Master has at-
tempted to write to a non---exist-
ent register or a read---only regis-
ter in the controller.
6. Verify that the BAS is using the proper Modbus func-
tion codes to access data from our controller. Sup-
ported function codes are shown above.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-
troller.
8. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper
Modbus register numbers on the controller. Download
the latest points list for the controller to verify.
9. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the
proper slave address of our controller.
NOTE: See RTU-MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (or
alternatively Form 48-50H-T-1T, Appendix) for Modbus
Protocol Conformance Statement.
ECONOMIZER SYSTEMS
The 48TC units may be equipped with a factory-installed
or accessory (field-installed) economizer system. Two
types are available: with
(EconoMi$er IV) and without
a
logic control system
control system
a
(EconoMi$er2, for use with external control systems such
as PremierLink). See Fig. 70 and Fig. 71 for component
locations on each type. See Fig. 72 and Fig. 73 for
economizer section wiring diagrams.
Both EconoMi$ers use direct-drive damper actuators.
N2
ECONOMI$ER IV
CONTROLLER
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to
speak the N2 protocol. The protocol of the controller
is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6). The protocol
can also be verified by getting a Modstat of the con-
troller through the BACview. Hit the “FN” key and
the ’.’ key at the same time to pull up a Modstat.
Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is a section
entitled ”Network Communications.” The active pro-
tocol and baud rate will be shown in this section.
OUTSIDE AIR
WIRING
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
HARNESS
LOW AMBIENT
SENSOR
ACTUATOR
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for 9600
baud. The baud rate of the controller is set via SW3
(switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also be verified
via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat (see above).
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2-wire
EIA-485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-
figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
C06021
Fig. 70 - EconoMi$er IV Component Locations
OUTDOOR
AIR HOOD
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same
communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1
stop bit).
ECONOMI$ER2
HOOD
PLUG
SHIPPING
BRACKET
5. Verify that the controller has a unique N2 slave ad-
dress on the N2 bus. The controller’s N2 slave ad-
dress is set by its rotary address switches.
6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-
troller.
7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper
network point addresses on the controller. Download
the latest points list for the controller to verify.
GEAR DRIVEN
BAROMETRIC
DAMPER
RELIEF
DAMPER
C06022
Fig. 71 - EconoMi$er2 Component Locations
8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the
proper slave address of our controller.
NOTE: See RTU-MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (or
alternatively Form 48-50H-T-1T Appendix) for N2
Protocol Conformance Statement.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR OCCUPANCY CONTROL
REPLACE JUMPER WITH
FIELD-SUPPLIED TIME CLOCK
8
7
Potentiometer Defaults Settings:
LEGEND
NOTES:
Power Exhaust Middle
1. 620 ohm, 1 watt 5% resistor should be removed only when using differential
DCV— Demand Controlled Ventilation
IAQ — Indoor Air Quality
Minimum Pos.
DCV Max.
DCV Set
Fully Closed
enthalpy or dry bulb.
Middle
2. If a separate field-supplied 24 v transformer is used for the IAQ sensor power
supply, it cannot have the secondary of the transformer grounded.
3. For field-installed remote minimum position POT, remove black wire jumper
between P and P1 and set control minimum position POT to the minimum
position.
LA — Low Ambient Lockout Device
OAT — Outdoor-Air Temperature
POT— Potentiometer
Middle
C Setting
Enthalpy
RAT — Return-Air Temperature
C06028
Fig. 72 - EconoMi$er IV Wiring
BLACK
BLUE
4
3
TRANSFORMER
GROUND
5
2
500 OHM
RESISTOR
8
VIOLET
PINK
6
NOTE 1
7
RUN
OAT SENSOR
RED
24 VAC
1
NOTE 3
10
11
9
50HJ540573
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
4-20 mA
WHITE
DIRECT DRIVE
ACTUATOR
TO J9 ON
PremierLink
BOARD
4-20mA SIGNAL
12
ECONOMISER2 PLUG
NOTES:
1. Switch on actuator must be in run position for economizer to operate.
2. PremierLink™ control requires that the standard 50HJ540569 outside-air sensor be replaced by either the CROASENR001A00 dry bulb sen
sor or HH57A077 enthalpy sensor.
3. 50HJ540573 actuator consists of the 50HJ540567 actuator and a harness with 500-ohm resistor.
C08310
Fig. 73 - EconoMi$er2 with 4 to 20 mA Control Wiring
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 27 – EconoMi$er IV Input/Output Logic
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
N Terminal†
Enthalpy*
Compressor
Demand Control
Ventilation (DCV)
Y1 Y2
Occupied
Unoccupied
Closed
Stage Stage
Outdoor
Return
Low
1
2
Damper
On On
On Off
Off Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
High
(Free Cooling LED
Off)
Minimum position
Below set
(DCV LED Off)
Modulating** (between
min. position and full-
open)
Modulating** (be-
tween closed and
full-open)
On On
On
Off
Low
(Free Cooling LED
On)
High
On Off
Off Off
On On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Minimum position
Closed
Modulating†† (be-
tween closed and
DCV
High
(Free Cooling LED
Off)
Modulating†† (between
min. position and DCV
maximum)
On Off
Off Off
On On
On Off
Off Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Low
Above set
(DCV LED On)
maximum)
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Low
(Free Cooling LED
On)
High
Modulating***
Modulating†††
*
†
For single enthalpy control, the module compares outdoor enthalpy to the ABCD setpoint.
Power at N terminal determines Occupied/Unoccupied setting: 24 vac (Occupied), no power (Unoccupied).
** Modulation is based on the supply-air sensor signal.
†† Modulation is based on the DCV signal.
*** Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between minimum position and either maximum position (DCV)
or fully open (supply-air signal).
††† Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between closed and either maximum position (DCV) or fully
open (supply-air signal).
C06053
Fig. 74 - EconoMi$er IV Functional View
EconoMi$er IV Standard Sensors
EconoMi$er IV
Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor
Table 27 provides a summary of EconoMi$er IV.
Troubleshooting instructions are enclosed.
The outdoor air temperature sensor (HH57AC074) is a 10
to 20 mA device used to measure the outdoor-air
temperature. The outdoor-air temperature is used to
determine when the EconoMi$er IV can be used for free
cooling. The sensor is factory-installed on the
EconoMi$er IV in the outdoor airstream. (See Fig. 75.)
The operating range of temperature measurement is 40_ to
100_F (4_ to 38_C). See Fig. 77.
A functional view of the EconoMi$er is shown in Fig. 74.
Typical settings, sensor ranges, and jumper positions are
also shown. An EconoMi$er IV simulator program is
available from Carrier to help with EconoMi$er IV
training and troubleshooting.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor
and D. See Fig. 77 for the corresponding temperature
changeover values.
The supply air temperature sensor is a 3 K thermistor
located at the inlet of the indoor fan. (See Fig. 75.) This
sensor is factory installed. The operating range of
temperature measurement is 0° to 158_F (-18_ to 70_C).
See Table 15 for sensor temperature/resistance values.
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
MOUNTING
LOCATION
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
C06033
C06034
Fig. 76 - EconoMi$er IV Controller Potentiometer
and LED Locations
Fig. 75 - Supply Air Sensor Location
The temperature sensor looks like an eyelet terminal with
wires running to it. The sensor is located in the “crimp
end” and is sealed from moisture.
19
LED ON
18
Outdoor Air Lockout Sensor
D
17
The EconoMi$er IV is equipped with an ambient
temperature lockout switch located in the outdoor
airstream which is used to lock out the compressors below
a 42_F (6_C) ambient temperature. (See Fig. 70.)
LED ON
LED OFF
16
15
14
C
LED ON
LED OFF
B
13
12
EconoMi$er IV Control Modes
LED ON
LED OFF
A
11
10
9
IMPORTANT: The optional EconoMi$er2 does not
include a controller. The EconoMi$er2 is operated by a 4
to 20 mA signal from an existing field-supplied controller
(such as PremierLink™ control). See Fig. 72 for wiring
information.
LED OFF
85 90
95
100
50
55 60
70 75
DEGREES FAHRENHEIT
40 45
65
80
C06035
Determine the EconoMi$er IV control mode before set up
of the control. Some modes of operation may require
different sensors. (See Table 22.) The EconoMi$er IV is
supplied from the factory with a supply-air temperature
sensor and an outdoor- air temperature sensor. This allows
for operation of the EconoMi$er IV with outdoor air dry
bulb changeover control. Additional accessories can be
added to allow for different types of changeover control
and operation of the EconoMi$er IV and unit.
Fig. 77 - Outside Air Temperature Changeover
Setpoints
30
25
20
15
10
5
Outdoor Dry Bulb Changeover
The standard controller is shipped from the factory
configured for outdoor dry bulb changeover control. The
outdoor air and supply air temperature sensors are
included as standard. For this control mode, the outdoor
temperature is compared to an adjustable setpoint selected
on the control. If the outdoor-air temperature is above the
setpoint, the EconoMi$er IV will adjust the outside air
dampers to minimum position. If the outdoor-air
temperature is below the setpoint, the position of the
outside air dampers will be controlled to provided free
cooling using outdoor air. When in this mode, the LED
next to the free cooling setpoint potentiometer will be on.
The changeover temperature setpoint is controlled by the
free cooling setpoint potentiometer located on the control.
(See Fig. 76.) The scale on the potentiometer is A, B, C,
0
0.13 0.20 0.22 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
C06031
Fig. 78 - Outdoor-Air Damper Leakage
Differential Dry Bulb Control
For differential dry bulb control the standard outdoor dry
bulb sensor is used in conjunction with an additional
accessory
dry
bulb
sensor
(part
number
CRTEMPSN002A00). The accessory sensor must be
mounted in the return airstream. (See Fig. 79.) Wiring is
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
provided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness. (See Fig.
70.)
In this mode of operation, the outdoor-air temperature is
compared to the return-air temperature and the lower
temperature airstream is used for cooling. When using this
mode of changeover control, turn the enthalpy setpoint
potentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting. (See Fig.
76.)
ECONOMI$ERIV
CONTROLLER
ECONOMI$ERIV
Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover
For enthalpy control, accessory enthalpy sensor (part
number HH57AC078) is required. Replace the standard
outdoor dry bulb temperature sensor with the accessory
enthalpy sensor in the same mounting location. (See Fig.
79.) When the outdoor air enthalpy rises above the
outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint, the outdoor-air
damper moves to its minimum position. The outdoor
enthalpy changeover setpoint is set with the outdoor
enthalpy setpoint potentiometer on the EconoMi$er IV
controller. The setpoints are A, B, C, and D. (See Fig. 80.)
The factory-installed 620-ohm jumper must be in place
across terminals SR and SR+ on the EconoMi$er IV
controller.
GROMMET
RETURN AIR
SENSOR
RETURN DUCT
(FIELD-PROVIDED)
C07085
Fig. 79 - Return Air Temperature or Enthalpy Sensor
Mounting Location
85
90
95 100 105 110
(29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43)
CONTROL CONTROL POINT
CURVE
APPROX. deg. F (deg. C)
AT 50% RH
80
(27)
A
B
C
D
73 (23)
70 (21)
67 (19)
63 (17)
75
(24)
70
(21)
65
(18)
0
6
60
(16)
A
55
(13)
B
50
(10)
C
45
(7)
D
40
(4)
35
(2)
A
B
C
D
HIGH LIMIT
CURVE
35
(2)
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100 105 110
(4) (7) (10) (13) (16) (18) (21) (24) (27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43)
APPROXIMATE DRY BULB TEMPERATURE--degrees F (degrees C)
C06037
Fig. 80 - Enthalpy Changeover Setpoints
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CO SENSOR MAX RANGE SETTING
2
TR1
EXH
Set
10V
TR
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
N1
N
2V
EXH
24
Va c
HOT
24 Vac
COM
P1
T1
P
T
Min
Pos
800 ppm
900 ppm
1000 ppm
1100 ppm
_
+
Open
DCV
Max
10V
1
2
5
2V
AQ1
AQ
SO+
SO
SR+
SR
DCV
DCV
Set
10V
4
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2V
DAMPER VOLTAGE FOR MAX VENTILATION RATE
Free
Cool
EF1
EF
C06039
C
D
B
Fig. 82 - CO2 Sensor Maximum Range Settings
A
If a separate field-supplied transformer is used to power
the IAQ sensor, the sensor must not be grounded or the
EconoMi$er IV control board will be damaged.
When using demand ventilation, the minimum damper
position represents the minimum ventilation position for
C06038
Fig. 81 - EconoMi$er IV Control
Differential Enthalpy Control
For differential enthalpy control, the EconoMi$er IV
controller uses two enthalpy sensors (HH57AC078 and
CRENTDIF004A00), one in the outside air and one in the
return air duct. The EconoMi$er IV controller compares
the outdoor air enthalpy to the return air enthalpy to
determine EconoMi$er IV use. The controller selects the
lower enthalpy air (return or outdoor) for cooling. For
example, when the outdoor air has a lower enthalpy than
the return air, the EconoMi$er IV opens to bring in
outdoor air for free cooling.
Replace the standard outside air dry bulb temperature
sensor with the accessory enthalpy sensor in the same
mounting location. (See Fig. 70.) Mount the return air
enthalpy sensor in the return air duct. (See Fig. 79.)
Wiring is provided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness.
(See Fig. 70.) The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is
set with the outdoor enthalpy setpoint potentiometer on
the EconoMi$er IV controller. When using this mode of
changeover control, turn the enthalpy setpoint
potentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting.
VOC (volatile
organic
compounds) ventilation
requirements. The maximum demand ventilation position
is used for fully occupied ventilation.
When demand ventilation control is not being used, the
minimum position potentiometer should be used to set the
occupied ventilation position. The maximum demand
ventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.
Exhaust Setpoint Adjustment
The exhaust setpoint will determine when the exhaust fan
runs based on damper position (if accessory power
exhaust is installed). The setpoint is modified with the
Exhaust Fan Setpoint (EXH SET) potentiometer. (See Fig.
76.) The setpoint represents the damper position above
which the exhaust fans will be turned on. When there is a
call for exhaust, the EconoMi$er IV controller provides a
45 ± 15 second delay before exhaust fan activation to
allow the dampers to open. This delay allows the damper
to reach the appropriate position to avoid unnecessary fan
overload.
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Sensor Input
Minimum Position Control
The IAQ input can be used for demand control ventilation
control based on the level of CO2 measured in the space
or return air duct.
Mount the accessory IAQ sensor according to
manufacturer specifications. The IAQ sensor should be
wired to the AQ and AQ1 terminals of the controller.
Adjust the DCV potentiometers to correspond to the DCV
voltage output of the indoor air quality sensor at the
user-determined setpoint. (See Fig. 82.)
There is a minimum damper position potentiometer on the
EconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 76.) The minimum
damper position maintains the minimum airflow into the
building during the occupied period.
When using demand ventilation, the minimum damper
position represents the minimum ventilation position for
VOC
(volatile
organic
compound)
ventilation
requirements. The maximum demand ventilation position
is used for fully occupied ventilation.
When demand ventilation control is not being used, the
minimum position potentiometer should be used to set the
occupied ventilation position. The maximum demand
ventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.
Adjust the minimum position potentiometer to allow the
minimum amount of outdoor air, as required by local
codes, to enter the building. Make minimum position
adjustments with at least 10_F temperature difference
between the outdoor and return-air temperatures.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To determine the minimum position setting, perform the
following procedure:
timeclock function in place of the jumper between TR and
N. When the timeclock contacts are closed, the
EconoMi$er IV control will be in occupied mode. When
the timeclock contacts are open (removing the 24-v signal
from terminal N), the EconoMi$er IV will be in
unoccupied mode.
1. Calculate the appropriate mixed air temperature
using the following formula:
OA
100
RA
100
+ (TR x
(TO x
)
) =TM
Demand Control Ventilation (DCV)
When using the EconoMi$er IV for demand controlled
ventilation, there are some equipment selection criteria
which should be considered. When selecting the heat
capacity and cool capacity of the equipment, the
maximum ventilation rate must be evaluated for design
conditions. The maximum damper position must be
calculated to provide the desired fresh air.
Typically the maximum ventilation rate will be about 5 to
10% more than the typical cfm required per person, using
normal outside air design criteria.
TO = Outdoor-Air Temperature
OA = Percent of Outdoor Air
TR = Return-Air Temperature
RA = Percent of Return Air
TM = Mixed-Air Temperature
As an example, if local codes require 10% outdoor
air during occupied conditions, outdoor-air
temperature is 60_F, and return-air temperature is
75_F.
(60 x .10) + (75 x .90) = 73.5_F
2. Disconnect the supply air sensor from terminals T
and T1.
3. Ensure that the factory-installed jumper is in place
across terminals P and P1. If remote damper
positioning is being used, make sure that the
terminals are wired according to Fig. 59 and that the
minimum position potentiometer is turned fully
clockwise.
A proportional anticipatory strategy should be taken with
the following conditions: a zone with a large area, varied
occupancy, and equipment that cannot exceed the required
ventilation rate at design conditions. Exceeding the
required ventilation rate means the equipment can
condition air at a maximum ventilation rate that is greater
than the required ventilation rate for maximum
occupancy. A proportional-anticipatory strategy will cause
the fresh air supplied to increase as the room CO2 level
increases even though the CO2 setpoint has not been
reached. By the time the CO2 level reaches the setpoint,
the damper will be at maximum ventilation and should
maintain the setpoint.
In order to have the CO2 sensor control the economizer
damper in this manner, first determine the damper voltage
output for minimum or base ventilation. Base ventilation
is the ventilation required to remove contaminants during
unoccupied periods. The following equation may be used
to determine the percent of outside air entering the
building for a given damper position. For best results there
should be at least a 10 degree difference in outside and
return-air temperatures.
4. Connect 24 vac across terminals TR and TR1.
5. Carefully
adjust
the
minimum
position
potentiometer until the measured mixed air
temperature matches the calculated value.
6. Reconnect the supply air sensor to terminals T and
T1.
Remote control of the EconoMi$er IV damper is desirable
when requiring additional temporary ventilation. If a
field-supplied remote potentiometer (Honeywell part
number S963B1128) is wired to the EconoMi$er IV
controller, the minimum position of the damper can be
controlled from a remote location.
To control the minimum damper position remotely,
remove the factory-installed jumper on the P and P1
terminals on the EconoMi$er IV controller. Wire the
field-supplied potentiometer to the P and P1 terminals on
the EconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 81.)
OA
100
RA
100
+ (TR x
(TO x
)
) =TM
TO = Outdoor-Air Temperature
OA = Percent of Outdoor Air
TR = Return-Air Temperature
RA = Percent of Return Air
Damper Movement
Damper movement from full open to full closed (or vice
versa) takes 21/2 minutes.
T
M = Mixed-Air Temperature
Thermostats
Once base ventilation has been determined, set the
minimum damper position potentiometer to the correct
position.
The EconoMi$er IV control works with conventional
thermostats that have a Y1 (cool stage 1), Y2 (cool stage
2), W1 (heat stage 1), W2 (heat stage 2), and G (fan). The
EconoMi$er IV control does not support space
temperature sensors. Connections are made at the
thermostat terminal connection board located in the main
control box.
The same equation can be used to determine the occupied
or maximum ventilation rate to the building. For example,
an output of 3.6 volts to the actuator provides a base
ventilation rate of 5% and an output of 6.7 volts provides
the maximum ventilation rate of 20% (or base plus 15 cfm
per person). Use Fig. 82 to determine the maximum
setting of the CO2 sensor. For example, an 1100 ppm
setpoint relates to a 15 cfm per person design. Use the
1100 ppm curve on Fig. 82 to find the point when the CO2
sensor output will be 6.7 volts. Line up the point on the
Occupancy Control
The factory default configuration for the EconoMi$er IV
control is occupied mode. Occupied status is provided by
the black jumper from terminal TR to terminal N. When
unoccupied mode is desired, install a field-supplied
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
graph with the left side of the chart to determine that the
range configuration for the CO2 sensor should be 1800
ppm. The EconoMi$er IV controller will output the 6.7
volts from the CO2 sensor to the actuator when the CO2
concentration in the space is at 1100 ppm. The DCV
setpoint may be left at 2 volts since the CO2 sensor
voltage will be ignored by the EconoMi$er IV controller
until it rises above the 3.6 volt setting of the minimum
position potentiometer.
Once the fully occupied damper position has been
determined, set the maximum damper demand control
ventilation potentiometer to this position. Do not set to the
maximum position as this can result in over-ventilation to
the space and potential high humidity levels.
4. Use the Up/Down button to toggle through each of
the nine variables, starting with Altitude, until the
desired setting is reached.
5. Press Mode to move through the variables.
6. Press Enter to lock in the selection, then press Mode
to continue to the next variable.
Dehumidification of Fresh Air with DCV (Demand
Controlled Ventilation) Control
If normal rooftop heating and cooling operation is not
adequate for the outdoor humidity level, an energy
recovery unit and/or a dehumidification option should be
considered.
EconoMi$er IV Preparation
CO2 Sensor Configuration
This procedure is used to prepare the EconoMi$er IV for
troubleshooting. No troubleshooting or testing is done by
performing the following procedure.
The CO2 sensor has preset standard voltage settings that
can be selected anytime after the sensor is powered up.
(See Table 28.)
NOTE: This procedure requires a 9-v battery, 1.2
kilo-ohm resistor, and a 5.6 kilo-ohm resistor which are
not supplied with the EconoMi$er IV.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to record the positions of all
potentiometers before starting troubleshooting.
Use setting 1 or 2 for Carrier equipment. (See Table 28.)
1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5
seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.
2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.
1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1. All LEDs should
be off. Exhaust fan contacts should be open.
2. Disconnect device at P and P1.
3. Jumper P to P1.
4. Disconnect wires at T and T1. Place 5.6 kilo-ohm
resistor across T and T1.
5. Jumper TR to 1.
6. Jumper TR to N.
7. If connected, remove sensor from terminals SO and +.
Connect 1.2 kilo-ohm 4074EJM checkout resistor
across terminals SO and +.
8. Put 620-ohm resistor across terminals SR and +.
9. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust po-
tentiometers fully CCW (counterclockwise).
Table 28 – EconoMi$er IV Sensor Usage
ECONOMI$ER IV WITH OUTDOOR AIR DRY
BULB SENSOR
Accessories Required
None. The outdoor air dry bulb sensor is
factory installed.
APPLICATION
Outdoor Air
Dry Bulb
Differential
CRTEMPSN002A00*
HH57AC078
Dry Bulb
Single Enthalpy
Differential
Enthalpy
HH57AC078 and CRENTDIF004A00*
CO for DCV
2
Control using a
Wall-Mounted
CO Sensor
33ZCSENCO2
2
2
CO for DCV
33ZCSENCO2† and
33ZCASPCO2**
O
R
Control using a
Duct-Mounted
CRCBDIOX005A00††
CO Sensor
10. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer fully CW
(clockwise).
11. Set enthalpy potentiometer to D.
12. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.
Differential Enthalpy
2
*
CRENTDIF004A00 and CRTEMPSN002A00 accessories are
used on many different base units. As such, these kits may
contain parts that will not be needed for installation.
†
33ZCSENCO2 is an accessory CO sensor.
2
** 33ZCASPCO2 is an accessory aspirator box required for duct-
mounted applications.
†† CRCBDIOX005A00 is an accessory that contains both
33ZCSENCO2 and 33ZCASPCO2 accessories.
To check differential enthalpy:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has
been performed.
2. Place 620-ohm resistor across SO and +.
3. Place 1.2 kilo-ohm resistor across SR and +. The
Free Cool LED should be lit.
4. Remove 620-ohm resistor across SO and +. The Free
Cool LED should turn off.
3. Use the Up/Down button to select the preset
number. (See Table 28.)
4. Press Enter to lock in the selection.
5. Press Mode to exit and resume normal operation.
The custom settings of the CO2 sensor can be changed
anytime after the sensor is energized. Follow the steps
below to change the non-standard settings:
5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal
after completing troubleshooting.
1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5
seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.
2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.
3. Use the Up/Down button to toggle to the NONSTD
menu and press Enter.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Single Enthalpy
5. Turn the Minimum Position potentiometer to mid-
point. The actuator should drive to between 20 and
80% open.
6. Turn the Minimum Position Potentiometer fully CW.
The actuator should drive fully open.
7. Remove the jumper from TR and N. The actuator
should drive fully closed.
8. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal
after completing troubleshooting.
To check single enthalpy:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has
been performed.
2. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to A (fully CCW). The
Free Cool LED should be lit.
3. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to D (fully CW). The
Free Cool LED should turn off.
4. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal
after completing troubleshooting.
Supply-Air Sensor Input
To check supply-air sensor input:
DCV (Demand Controlled Ventilation) and Power
Exhaust
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has
been performed.
2. Set the Enthalpy potentiometer to A. The Free Cool
LED turns on. The actuator should drive to between
20 and 80% open.
To check DCV and Power Exhaust:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has
been performed.
2. Ensure terminals AQ and AQ1 are open. The LED for
both DCV and Exhaust should be off. The actuator
should be fully closed.
3. Connect a 9-v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1
(negative node). The LED for both DCV and Exhaust
should turn on. The actuator should drive to between
90 and 95% open.
4. Turn the Exhaust potentiometer CW until the Exhaust
LED turns off. The LED should turn off when the po-
tentiometer is approximately 90%. The actuator
should remain in position.
3. Remove the 5.6 kilo-ohm resistor and jumper T to
T1. The actuator should drive fully open.
4. Remove the jumper across T and T1. The actuator
should drive fully closed.
5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal
after completing troubleshooting.
EconoMi$er IV Troubleshooting Completion
This procedure is used to return the EconoMi$er IV to
operation. No troubleshooting or testing is done by
performing the following procedure.
5. Turn the DCV setpoint potentiometer CW until the
DCV LED turns off. The DCV LED should turn off
when the potentiometer is approximately 9-v. The ac-
tuator should drive fully closed.
6. Turn the DCV and Exhaust potentiometers CCW until
the Exhaust LED turns on. The exhaust contacts will
close 30 to 120 seconds after the Exhaust LED turns
on.
1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1.
2. Set enthalpy potentiometer to previous setting.
3. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer to previ-
ous setting.
4. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust po-
tentiometers to previous settings.
5. Remove 620-ohm resistor from terminals SR and +.
6. Remove 1.2 kilo-ohm checkout resistor from termin-
als SO and +. If used, reconnect sensor from termin-
als SO and +.
7. Remove jumper from TR to N.
8. Remove jumper from TR to 1.
7. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal
after completing troubleshooting.
DCV Minimum and Maximum Position
To check the DCV minimum and maximum position:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has
been performed.
9. Remove 5.6 kilo-ohm resistor from T and T1. Recon-
nect wires at T and T1.
2. Connect a 9-v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1
(negative node). The DCV LED should turn on. The
actuator should drive to between 90 and 95% open.
3. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer to
midpoint. The actuator should drive to between 20
and 80% open.
10. Remove jumper from P to P1. Reconnect device at P
and P1.
11. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
See Fig. 83 and Fig. 84 for typical wiring diagrams.
4. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer to
fully CCW. The actuator should drive fully closed.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C08308
Fig. 83 - 48TC Typical Unit Wiring Diagram - Power (A06, 208/230-3-60)
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Verify the following conditions:
PRE--START--UP
a. Make sure that condenser-fan blade are correctly
positioned in fan orifice. See Condenser-Fan
Adjustment section for more details.
b. Make sure that air filter(s) is in place.
c. Make sure that condensate drain trap is filled
with water to ensure proper drainage.
!
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal
injury or death.
1. Follow recognized safety practices and wear pro-
tective goggles when checking or servicing refri-
gerant system.
2. Do not operate compressor or provide any electric
power to unit unless compressor terminal cover is
in place and secured.
3. Do not remove compressor terminal cover until
all electrical sources are disconnected.
d. Make sure that all tools and miscellaneous loose
parts have been removed.
START--UP, GENERAL
Unit Preparation
Make sure that unit has been installed in accordance with
installation instructions and applicable codes.
Gas Piping
4. Relieve all pressure from system before touching
or disturbing anything inside terminal box if refri-
gerant leak is suspected around compressor ter-
minals.
5. Never attempt to repair soldered connection while
refrigerant system is under pressure.
6. Do not use torch to remove any component. Sys-
tem contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.
To remove a component, wear protective goggles
and proceed as follows:
Check gas piping for leaks.
!
WARNING
UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal
injury or death.
Disconnect gas piping from unit when leak testing at
pressure greater than 1/2 psig. Pressures greater than
1/2 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting in
hazardous condition. If gas valve is subjected to
pressure greater than 1/2 psig, it must be replaced
before use. When pressure testing field-supplied gas
piping at pressures of 1/2 psig or less, a unit connected
to such piping must be isolated by manually closing
the gas valve.
a. Shut off electrical power and then gas to unit.
b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from
system using both high-pressure and low
pressure ports.
c. Cut component connection tubing with tubing
cutter and remove component from unit.
d. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs
when necessary. Oil can ignite when exposed
to torch flame.
Return--Air Filters
Make sure correct filters are installed in unit (see
Appendix II - Physical Data). Do not operate unit without
return-air filters.
Proceed as follows to inspect and prepare the unit for
initial start-up:
1. Remove all access panels.
Outdoor--Air Inlet Screens
2. Read and follow instructions on all WARNING,
CAUTION, and INFORMATION labels attached to,
or shipped with, unit.
Outdoor-air inlet screen must be in place before operating
unit.
3. Make the following inspections:
Compressor Mounting
a. Inspect for shipping and handling damages such
as broken lines, loose parts, or disconnected
wires, etc.
Compressors are internally spring mounted. Do not loosen
or remove compressor hold down bolts.
Internal Wiring
b. Inspect for oil at all refrigerant tubing connec-
tions and on unit base. Detecting oil generally
indicates a refrigerant leak. Leak-test all refri-
gerant tubing connections using electronic leak
detector, halide torch, or liquid-soap solution.
Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes.
Tighten as required.
Refrigerant Service Ports
c. Inspect all field-wiring and factory-wiring con-
nections. Be sure that connections are completed
and tight. Be sure that wires are not in contact
with refrigerant tubing or sharp edges.
Each unit system has two 1/4” SAE flare (with check
valves) service ports: one on the suction line, and one on
the compressor discharge line. Be sure that caps on the
ports are tight.
d. Inspect coil fins. If damaged during shipping and
handling, carefully straighten fins with a fin
comb.
Compressor Rotation
On 3-phase units with scroll compressors, it is important
to be certain compressor is rotating in the proper
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
direction. To determine whether or not compressor is
rotating in the proper direction:
3. Set system switch selector at HEAT position and fan
switch at AUTO. or ON position. Set heating temper-
ature lever above room temperature.
1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pres-
sure fittings.
4. The induced-draft motor will start.
5. After a call for heating, the main burners should light
within 5 seconds. If the burner does not light, then
there is a 22-second delay before another 5-second
try. If the burner still does not light, the time delay is
repeated. If the burner does not light within 15
minutes, there is a lockout. To reset the control, break
the 24 v power to W1.
6. The evaporator-fan motor will turn on 45 seconds
after burner ignition.
7. The evaporator-fan motor will turn off in 45 seconds
after the thermostat temperature is satisfied.
2. Energize the compressor.
3. The suction pressure should drop and the discharge
pressure should rise, as is normal on any start-up.
If the suction pressure does not drop and the discharge
pressure does not rise to normal levels:
4. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotating
in the wrong direction.
5. Turn off power to the unit and install lockout tag.
6. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.
7. Re-energize to the compressor. Check pressures.
8. Adjust airflow to obtain a temperature rise within the
range specified on the unit nameplate.
The suction and discharge pressure levels should now
move to their normal start-up levels.
NOTE: The default value for the evaporator-fan motor
on/off delay is 45 seconds. The Integrated Gas Unit
Controller (IGC) modifies this value when abnormal limit
switch cycles occur. Based upon unit operating conditions,
the on delay can be reduced to 0 seconds and the off delay
can be extended to 180 seconds. When one flash of the
LED is observed, the evaporator-fan on/off delay has
been modified.
NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrong
direction, the unit will make an elevated level of noise
and will not provide cooling.
Cooling
Set space thermostat to OFF position. To start unit, turn on
main power supply. Set system selector switch at COOL
position and fan switch at AUTO. position. Adjust
If the limit switch trips at the start of the heating cycle
during the evaporator on delay, the time period of the on
delay for the next cycle will be 5 seconds less than the
time at which the switch tripped. (Example: If the limit
switch trips at 30 seconds, the evaporator-fan on delay for
the next cycle will occur at 25 seconds.) To prevent
short-cycling, a 5-second reduction will only occur if a
minimum of 10 minutes has elapsed since the last call for
heating.
thermostat to
Compressor starts on closure of contactor.
a
setting below room temperature.
Check unit charge. Refer to Refrigerant Charge section.
Reset thermostat at a position above room temperature.
Compressor will shut off. Evaporator fan will shut off
after a 30-second delay.
To shut off unit, set system selector switch at OFF
position. Resetting thermostat at a position above room
temperature shuts unit off temporarily until space
temperature exceeds thermostat setting.
The evaporator-fan off delay can also be modified. Once
the call for heating has ended, there is a 10-minute period
during which the modification can occur. If the limit
switch trips during this period, the evaporator-fan off
delay will increase by 15 seconds. A maximum of 9 trips
can occur, extending the evaporator-fan off delay to 180
seconds.
Main Burners
Main burners are factory set and should require no
adjustment.
To check ignition of main burners and heating controls,
move thermostat setpoint above room temperature and
verify that the burners light and evaporator fan is
energized. Check heating effect, then lower the thermostat
setting below the room temperature and verify that the
burners and evaporator fan turn off.
To restore the original default value, reset the power to the
unit.
To shut off unit, set system selector switch at OFF
position. Resetting heating selector lever below room
temperature will temporarily shut unit off until space
temperature falls below thermostat setting.
Refer to Tables 11 and 12 for the correct orifice to use at
high altitudes.
Ventilation (Continuous Fan)
Heating
Set fan and system selector switches at ON and OFF
positions, respectively. Evaporator fan operates
continuously to provide constant air circulation. When the
evaporator-fan selector switch is turned to the OFF
position, there is a 30-second delay before the fan turns
off.
1. Purge gas supply line of air by opening union ahead
of the gas valve. If gas odor is detected, tighten union
and wait 5 minutes before proceeding.
2. Turn on electrical supply and manual gas valve.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START
-UP, RTU-MP CONTROL
subsequent resets to factory defaults if the switch is left at
position 1.
START--UP, PREMIERLINK CONTROLS
To cause a reset of the non-volatile memory (to factory
defaults), turn the controller power off if it is on, move the
switch from position 1 to position 0, and then apply power
to the controller for a minimum of 5 seconds. At this
point, no action occurs, but the controller is now ready for
the memory to reset. Remove power to the controller
again and move the switch from position 0 to position 1.
This time, when power is applied, the memory will reset
to factory defaults. The controller address will return to
bus 0 element 31, indicating that memory reset occurred.
!
WARNING
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal
injury or death.
The unit must be electrically grounded in accordance
with local codes and NEC ANSI/NFPA 70 (American
National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection
Association.)
Refer to Installation Instruction 33CS-58SI for full
discussion on configuring the PremierLink control system.
Use the Carrier network communication software to start
up and configure the PremierLink controller.
Changes can be made using the ComfortWORKSr
software, ComfortVIEWt software, Network Service
Tool, System Pilott device, or Touch Pilott device. The
System Pilot and Touch Pilot are portable interface
devices that allow the user to change system set-up and
setpoints from a zone sensor or terminal control module.
During start-up, the Carrier software can also be used to
verify communication with PremierLink controller.
Field Service Test, explained below, will assist in proper
start-up. Configuration of unit parameters, scheduling
options, and operation are also discussed in this section.
Field Service Test
The Field Service Test function can be used to verify
proper operation of compressors, heating stages, indoor
NOTE: All set-up and setpoint configurations are factory
set and field-adjustable.
fan,
power
exhaust
fans,
economizer,
and
dehumidification. Use of Field Service Test is
recommended at initial system start up and during
troubleshooting. See Form 48-50H-T-2T, Appendix A for
Field Service Test Mode table.
Field Service Test mode has the following changes from
normal operation:
For specific operating instructions, refer to the literature
provided with user interface software.
Perform System Check--Out
1. Check correctness and tightness of all power and
communication connections.
2. At the unit, check fan and system controls for proper
operation.
3. At the unit, check electrical system and connections
of any optional electric reheat coil.
S Outdoor air temperature limits for cooling circuits,
economizer, and heating are ignored.
S Normal compressor time guards and other staging delays
are ignored.
S The status of Alarms (except Fire and Safety chain) is
ignored but all alerts and alarms are still broadcasted on
the network.
Field Service Test can be turned ON/OFF at the unit
display or from the network. Once turned ON, other
entries may be made with the display or through the
network. To turn Field Service Test on, change the value
of Test Mode to ON, to turn Field Service Test off, change
the value of Test Mode to OFF.
4. Check to be sure the area around the unit is clear of
construction dirt and debris.
5. Check that final filters are installed in the unit. Dust
and debris can adversely affect system operation.
6. Verify that the PremierLink controls are properly con-
nected to the CCN bus.
Initial Operation and Test
Perform the following procedure:
NOTE: Service Test mode is password protected when
accessing from the display. Depending on the unit model,
factory-installed options, and field-installed accessories,
some of the Field Service Test functions may not apply.
The independent outputs (IndpOutputs) submenu is used
to change output status for the supply fan, economizer,
and Power Exhaust. These independent outputs can
operate simultaneously with other Field Service Test
modes. All outputs return to normal operation when Field
Service Test is turned off.
The Cooling submenu is used to change output status for
the individual compressors and the dehumidification relay.
Compressor starts are not staggered. The fans and heating
service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling
service test. Indoor fans and outdoor fans are controlled
1. Apply 24 vac power to the control.
2. Connect the service tool to the phone jack service
port of the controller.
3. Using the Service Tool, upload the controller from
address 0, 31 at 9600 baud rate. The address may be
set at this time. Make sure that Service Tool is con-
nected to only one unit when changing the address.
Memory Reset
DIP switch 4 causes an E-squared memory reset to
factory defaults after the switch has been moved from
position 0 to position 1 and the power has been restored.
To enable the feature again, the switch must be put back
to the 0 position and power must be restored; this prevents
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
normally to maintain proper unit operation. All normal
cooling alarms and alerts are functional.
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the
NOTE: Circuit A is always operated with Circuit B due
to outdoor fan control on Circuit A. Always test Circuit A
first, and leave it on to test other Circuits.
The Heating submenu is used to change output status for
the individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans and
cooling service test outputs are reset to OFF for the
heating service test. All normal heating alarms and alerts
are functional.
alarm.
Compressor2 Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 2 Runtime
Alarm. After the number of hours set on this point is
exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and
must be manually cleared on the alarm rest screen after
the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then
begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance
interval
Configuration
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the
The RTU-MP controller configuration points affect the
unit operation and/or control. Review and understand the
meaning and purpose of each configuration point before
changing it from the factory default value. The submenus
containing configuration points are as follows: Unit,
Cooling, Heating, Inputs, Economizer, IAQ, Clock-Set,
and User Password (USERPW). Each configuration point
is described below under its according submenu. See
Form 48-50H-T-2T, Appendix for display tables.
alarm.
Cooling
Number of Compressor Stages
This refers to the number of mechanical cooling stages
available on a specific unit. Set this point to “One Stage”
if there is one compressor in the specific unit, set to “Two
Stage” if there are two compressors in the unit, and set to
“None” if economizer cooling ONLY is desired.
Unit
Start Delay
Factory Default = One Stage for 1 compressor units
Two Stage for 2 compressor units
This refers to the time delay the unit will wait after power
up before it pursues any specific operation.
Cooling/Econ SAT Low Setpt
Factory Default = 5 sec
Range = 0-600 sec
The supply air temperature must remain above this value
to allow cooling with the economizer and/or compressors.
There is 5_F plus and minus deadband to this point. If the
SAT falls below this value during cooling, all compressors
will be staged off. The economizer will start to ramp
down to minimum position when the SAT = this
configuration +5_F.
Filter Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Dirty Filter Alarm.
After the number of runtime hours set on this point is
exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and
must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen after
the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then
begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance
interval.
Factory Default = 600 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the
alarm.
Factory Default = 50_F
Range = 45-75_F
Cooling Lockout Temp
This defines the minimum outdoor air temperature that
cooling mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT falls
below this threshold during cooling, then compressor
cooling will not be allowed.
Supply Fan Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Supply Fan Runtime
Alarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this point
is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated,
and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen
after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will
then begin counting its runtime again for the next
maintenance interval.
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the
alarm.
Factory Default = 45_F
Range = 0-65_F
Heating
Heating SAT High Setpt
The supply air temperature must remain below this value
to allow heating. There is 5_F plus and minus deadband to
this point. If the SAT rises above this value during heating
the heat stages will begin to decrease until the SAT has
dropped below this value.
Factory Default = 120_F
Range = 95-150_F
Compressor1 Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 1 Runtime
Alarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this point
is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated,
and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen
after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will
then begin counting its runtime again for the next
maintenance interval.
Heating Lockout Temp
This defines the maximum outdoor air temperature that
heating mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT rises
above this threshold during heating, then heating will not
be allowed.
Factory Default = 65_F
Range = 49-95_F
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs
Input 1 Function
NOTE: For installation of inputs and field installed
accessories, refer to the appropriate sections.
This input is an analog input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQ
Sensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 1
is wired to pin J4-5.
Input 3
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Function, Compressor
Safety, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy.
This input can also be configured to be either Normally
Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 3 is factory
wired to pin J1-2. Field accessories get wired to its
parallel pin J5-5. Do not connect inputs to both locations,
one function per input.
Factory Default = No Sensor
Input 2 Function
This input is an analog input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQ
Sensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 2
is wired to pin J4-2.
Factory Default = No Sensor
Factory Default = Compressor Safety and N/O
Setpoint Slider Range
NOTE: Compressor Safety input comes from the CLO
board. J1-2 is always factory wired to TB1-8 (X) terminal
on the unit. If the unit has a CLO board, do not configure
input 3 for anything but Compressor Safety.
This sets the slider range of the space sensor (with this
built in function). The slider is used to offset the current
control setpoint.
Factory Default = 5 n_F
Range = 0-15 n_F
Input 5
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Function, Fire Shutdown,
Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This
input can also be configured to be either Normally Open
(N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 5 is factory wired
to pin J1-10. Field accessories get wired to its parallel pin
J5-3. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one
function per input.
T55/56 Override Duration
This sets the occupancy override duration when the
override button is pushed on the space sensor.
Factory Default = 1 hr
Range = 0-24 hr
IAQ Low Reference @ 4mA
This is used when an IAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or
2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seen at
the input.
Factory Default = Fire Shutdown and N/C
NOTE: Fire Shutdown input comes from TB4-7. J1-10
is always factory wired to TB4-7. Only change input 5s
function if absolutely needed.
Factory Default = 0 PPM
Range = 0-400 PPM
Input 8
IAQ High Reference @ 20mA
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Function, Enthalpy
Switch, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy.
This input can also be configured to be either Normally
Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 8 is factory
wired to pin J2-6. Field accessories get wired to its
parallel pin J5-1. Do not connect inputs to both locations,
one function per input.
This is used when an IAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or
2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seen at
the input.
Factory Default = 2000 PPM
Range = 0-5000 PPM
NOTE: IAQ low Reference @ 4mA and IAQ High
Reference @ 20mA are used to set the linear curve of mA
vs. PPM.
Factory Default = No Function and N/O
OAQ Low Reference @ 4mA
Input 9
This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1
or 2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seen
at the input.
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be
one of five different inputs: No Function, Humidistat, Fan
Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input can
also be configured to be either Normally Open (N/O) or
Normally Closed (N/C). Input 9 is factory and field wired
to pin J5-7. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one
function per input.
Factory Default = 0 PPM
Range = 0-400 PPM
OAQ High Reference @ 20mA
This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1
or 2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seen
at the input.
Factory Default = Humidistat and N/O
Space Sensor Type
Factory Default = 2000 PPM
Range = 0-5000 PPM
NOTE: OAQ low Reference @ 4mA and OAQ High
Reference @ 20mA are used to set the linear curve of mA
vs. PPM.
This tells the controller what type of space sensor is
installed to run the unit. The three types that can be used
are the T55 space sensor, the T56 space sensor, or the RS
space sensor.
Factory Default = T55 Type
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Economizer
USERPW
This submenu screen allows you to change the user
password to a four number password of choice. The User
password change screen is only accessible with the
Administrator Password (1111). The ADMIN password
will always override the user password.
Economizer Exists
This point tells the controller if there is an economizer
installed on the unit.
Factory Default = NO if no economizer
YES if there is an economizer installed
Economizer Minimum Position
OPERATING SEQUENCES
This defines the lowest economizer position when the
indoor fan is running and the building is occupied.
Base Unit Controls
Factory Default = 20%
Range = 0-100 %
Cooling, Units Without Economizer
When thermostat calls for cooling, terminals G and Y1 are
energized. The indoor-fan contactor (IFC) and
compressor contactor are energized and indoor-fan motor,
compressor, and outdoor fan starts. The outdoor fan motor
runs continuously while unit is cooling.
Economizer High OAT Lockout
If the outdoor air temperature rises above this value,
economizer cooling will be disabled and dampers will
return and stay at minimum position.
Factory Default = 75_F
Range = 55-80_F
Heating, Units Without Economizer
When the thermostat calls for heating, terminal W1 is
energized. To prevent thermostat short-cycling, the unit is
locked into the Heating mode for at least 1 minute when
W1 is energized. The induced-draft motor is energized
and the burner ignition sequence begins. The indoor
(evaporator) fan motor (IFM) is energized 45 seconds
after a flame is ignited. On units equipped for two stages
of heat, when additional heat is needed, W2 is energized
and the high-fire solenoid on the main gas valve (MGV)
is energized. When the thermostat is satisfied and W1 is
deenergized, the IFM stops after a 45-second time off
delay.
Power Exhaust Setpt
When the economizer damper position opens above this
point the power exhaust operation will begin. When the
damper position falls 10% below the setpoint, the power
exhaust will shutdown.
Factory Default = 50%
Range = 20-90 %
NOTE: This point is only used when Continuous Occ
Exhaust = NO
Continuous Occ Exhaust
This point tells the controller when to run the power
exhaust if equipped on the unit. If set to YES, the power
exhaust will be on all the time when in occupied mode
and will be off when in unoccupied mode. If set to NO the
power exhaust will be controlled by the Power Exhaust
Setpoint.
Cooling, Unit With EconoMi$er IV
For Occupied mode operation of EconoMi$er IV, there
must be a 24-v signal at terminals TR and N (provided
through PL6-3 from the unit’s IFC coil). Removing the
signal at N places the EconoMi$er IV control in
Unoccupied mode.
Factory Default = NO
IAQ
During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operation
will be accompanied by economizer dampers moving to
Minimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan is
off, dampers will close. During Unoccupied mode
operation, dampers will remain closed unless a Cooling
(by free cooling) or DCV demand is received.
Max Differential CO2 Setpt
If the difference between indoor an outdoor air quality
becomes greater then this value the damper position will
stay at the IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos. configuration
point
Factory Default = 650 PPM
Range = 300-950 PPM
Integrated EconoMi$er IV operation on 48TC single
compressor model requires a 2-stage thermostat (Y1 and
Y2 switches).
IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos.
This is the greatest minimum position the economizer will
open to while trying to control the indoor air quality, CO2
differential.
When free cooling using outside air is not available, the
unit cooling sequence will be controlled directly by the
space thermostat as described above as Cooling, Without
Economizer. Outside air damper position will be closed or
Minimum Position as determined by occupancy mode and
fan signal.
Factory Default = 50% open
Range = 10-60% open
Clockset
This submenu screen allows you to set the date and time
manually. The Daylight Savings Time (DST) can also be
changed here. The date and time is automatically set when
ever software is downloaded. The clock is a 24 hour clock
and not am/pm. The time should be verified (and maybe
changed) according to unit location and time zone.
When free cooling is available as determined by the
appropriate changeover command (dry bulb, outdoor
enthalpy, differential dry bulb or differential enthalpy), a
call for cooling (Y1 closes at the thermostat) will cause
the economizer control to modulate the dampers open and
closed to maintain the unit supply air temperature at 50 to
55_F. Compressor will not run.
Factory Default = Eastern Standard Time
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During free cooling operation, a supply air temperature
(SAT) above 50_F will cause the dampers to modulate
between Minimum Position setpoint and 100% open. With
SAT from 50_F to 45_F, the dampers will maintain at the
Minimum Position setting. With SAT below 45_F, the
outside air dampers will be closed. When SAT rises to
48_F, the dampers will re-open to Minimum Position
setting.
suitable for economizer cooling when an economizer
damper is available. A valid OAT, SPT (CCN space
temperature) and SAT (supply air temperature) sensor
MUST be installed for proper economizer operation. It
recommended that an outdoor or differential enthalpy
sensor also be installed. If one is not present, then a
jumper is needed on the ENTH input on J4, which will
indicate that the enthalpy will always be low. Economizer
operation will be based only on outdoor air dry bulb
temperature. The conditions are suitable when: enthalpy is
low, OAT is less than OATL High Lockout for TSTAT,
and OAT is less than OATMAX, the high setpoint for free
cooling. The default for OATL is 65_F. The default for
OATMAX is 75_F.
Should 100% outside air not be capable of satisfying the
space temperature, space temperature will rise until Y2 is
closed. The economizer control will call for compressor
operation. Dampers will modulate to maintain SAT at 50
to 55_F concurrent with compressor operation. The Low
Ambient Lockout Thermostat will block compressor
operation with economizer operation below 42_F outside
air temperature.
When all of the above conditions are satisfied and all the
required sensors are installed, the PremierLink controller
will use the economizer for cooling. One of three different
control routines will be used depending on the
temperature of the outside air. The routines use a PID loop
to control the SAT to a supply air setpoint (SASP) based
on the error from setpoint (SASPSAT). The SASP is
determined by the routine.
When space temperature demand is satisfied (thermostat
Y1 opens), the dampers will return to Minimum Damper
position if indoor fan is running or fully closed if fan is
off.
If accessory power exhaust is installed, the power exhaust
fan motors will be energized by the economizer control as
the dampers open above the PE-On setpoint and will be
de-energized as the dampers close below the PE-On
setpoint.
If an economizer is not available or the conditions are not
met for the following economizer routines below, the
compressors 1 and 2 will be cycled based on Y1 and Y2
inputs respectively.
Damper movement from full closed to full open (or vice
versa) will take between 1-1/2 and 2-1/2 minutes.
Any time the compressors are running, the PremierLink
controller will lock out the compressors if the SAT
becomes too low. These user configurable settings are
found in the SERVICE configuration table:
Heating With EconoMi$er IV
During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operation
will be accompanied by economizer dampers moving to
Minimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan is
off, dampers will close. During Unoccupied mode
operation, dampers will remain closed unless a DCV
demand is received.
Compressor 1 Lockout at SAT < SATLO1 (50 to 65_F)
(default is 55_F)
Compressor 2 Lockout at SAT < SATLO2 (45 to 55_F)
(default is 50_F)
After a compressor is locked out, it may be started again
after a normal time-guard period and the supply-air
temperature has increased at least 8_F above the lockout
setpoint.
When the room temperature calls for heat (W1 closes), the
heating controls are energized as described in Heating,
Unit Without Economizer above.
PremierLink Control
Routine No. 1: If the OAT ≤ DXLOCK (OAT DX lockout
temperature) and DX Cooling Lockout is enabled when
Y1 input is energized, the economizer will be modulated
to maintain SAT at the Supply Air Setpoint (SASP) =
SATLO1 + 3_F (Supply Air Low Temp lockout for
compressor 1). When Y2 is energized, the economizer
will be modulated to control to a lower SASP = SATLO2
+ 3_F (Supply Air Low Temp lockout for compressor no.
2). Mechanical cooling is locked out and will not be
energized.
THERMOSTAT MODE — If the PremierLink controller
is configured for Thermostat mode (TSTAT), it will
control only to the thermostat inputs on J4. These inputs
can be overridden through CCN communication via the
CV_TSTAT points display table. When in this mode, the
fire safety shutdown (FSD) input cannot be used, so any
fire/life safety shutdown must be physically wired to
disable the 24 vac control circuit to the unit.
Indoor Fan — The indoor fan output will be energized
whenever there is 24 vac present on the G input. The
indoor fan will be turned on without any delay and the
economizer damper will open to its minimum position if
the unit has a damper connected to the controller. This
will also occur if the PremierLink controller has been
configured for electric heat or heat pump operation.
Routine No. 2: If DXLOCK (or DX Cooling Lockout is
disabled) < OAT ≤ 68_F when Y1 input is energized, the
economizer will be modulated to maintain SAT at SASP =
SATLO1 + 3_F. If the SAT > SASP + 5_F and the
economizer position > 85% then the economizer will
close the to minimum position for three minutes or until
the SAT > 68_F. The economizer integrator will then be
reset and begin modulating to maintain the SASP after
stage one has been energized for 90 seconds.
Cooling — For cooling operation, there must be 24 vac
present on G. When G is active, the PremierLink
controller will then determine if outdoor conditions are
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Y2 is energized, the economizer will be modulated
to control to a lower supply air setpoint SASP= SATLO2
+ 3_F If the SAT > SASP + 5_F it will close the
economizer to minimum position for 3 minutes, reset the
integrator for the economizer, then start modulating the
economizer to maintain the SASP after the stage two has
been on for 90 seconds. This provides protection for the
compressor against flooded starts and allow refrigerant
flow to stabilize before modulating the economizer again.
By using return air across the evaporator coil just after the
compressor has started allows for increased refrigerant
flow rates providing better oil return of any oil washed out
during compressor start-up.
minimum position (MDP) and the greatest value becomes
the final minimum damper position (IQMP). If the
calculated IAQ Minimum Position is greater than the IAQ
maximum damper position (IAQMAXP) decision in the
SERVICE configuration table, then it will be clamped to
IAQMAXP value.
If IAQ is configured for low priority, the positioning of
the economizer damper can be overridden by comfort
requirements. If the SAT < SASP -8_F and both stages of
heat are on for more then 4 minutes or the SAT > SASP +
5_F and both stages of cooling on for more then 4 minutes
then the IAQ minimum damper position will become 0
and the IQMP = MDP. IAQ mode will resume when the
SAT > SASP -8_F in heating or the SAT < SASP + 5_F in
cooling.
Routine No. 3: If the OAT > 68_F and the enthalpy is low
and the OAT < SPT then the economizer will open to
100% and compressors 1 and 2 will be cycled based on
Y1 and Y2 inputs respectively. If any of these conditions
are not met the economizer will go to minimum position.
If the PremierLink controller is configured for 1 stage of
heat and cool or is only using a single stage thermostat
input, this function will not work as it requires the both
Y1 and Y2 or W1 and W2 inputs to be active. In this
application, it is recommended that the user configure
IAQ priority for high.
If there is no call for heating or cooling, the economizer,
if available, will maintain the SASP at 70_F.
Heating — For gas or electric heat, HS1 and HS2 outputs
will follow W1 and W2 inputs respectively. The fan will
also be turned on if it is configured for electric heat.
If IAQ is configured for high priority and the OAT < 55_F
and the SAT < (SPT -10_F), the algorithm will enable the
heat stages to maintain the SAT between the SPT and the
SPT + 10_F.
Heating may also be energized when an IAQ sensor
installed and has overridden the minimum economizer
damper position. If the OAT < 55_F and an IAQ sensor is
installed and the IAQ minimum position > minimum
damper position causing the SAT to decrease below the
SPT - 10_F, then the heat stages will be cycled to temper
the SAT to maintain a temperature between the SPT and
the SPT + 10_F.
CCN SENSOR MODE — When the PremierLink
controller is configured for CCN control, it will control
the compressor, economizer and heating outputs based its
own space temperature input and setpoints or those
received from Linkage. An optional CO2 IAQ sensor
mounted in the space or received through communications
can also influence the economizer and heating outputs.
The PremierLink controller does not have a hardware
clock so it must have another device on the CCN
communication bus broadcasting time. The controller will
maintain its own time once it has received time as long as
it has power and will send a request for time once a
minute until it receives time when it has lost power and
power is restored. The controller will control to
unoccupied setpoints until it has received a valid time.
The controller must have valid time in order to perform
any broadcast function, follow an occupancy schedule,
perform IAQ pre-occupancy purge and many other
functions as well. The following sections describe the
operation for the functions of the PremierLink controller.
Auxiliary Relay configured for Exhaust Fan — If the
Auxiliary Relay is configured for exhaust fan (AUXOUT
= 1) in the CONFIG configuration table and Continuous
Power Exhaust (MODPE) is enable in the SERVICE
configuration table then the output (HS3) will be
energized whenever the G input is on. If the MODPE is
disabled then output will be energized based on the Power
Exhaust Setpoint (PES) in the SETPOINT table.
Indoor Air Quality — If the optional indoor air quality
(IAQI) sensor is installed, the PremierLink controller will
maintain indoor air quality within the space at the
user-configured differential setpoint (IAQD) in the
CONFIG configuration table. The setpoint is the
difference between the IAQI and an optional outdoor air
quality sensor (OAQ). If the OAQ is not present then a
fixed value of 400 ppm is used. The actual space IAQ
setpoint (IAQS) is calculated as follows:
Indoor Fan — The indoor fan will be turned on whenever
any one of the following conditions are met:
S If the PremierLink controller is in the occupied mode and
ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for Yes in the
CONFIG table. This will be determined by its own
internal occupancy schedule if it is programmed to
follow its local schedule or broadcast its local schedule as
a global schedule, or following a global schedule
broadcast by another device.
IAQS = IAQD + OAQ (OAQ = 400 ppm if not present)
As air quality within the space changes, the minimum
position of the economizer damper will be changed also
thus allowing more or less outdoor air into the space
depending on the relationship of the IAQI to the IAQS.
The IAQ algorithm runs every 30 seconds and calculates
IAQ minimum position value using a PID loop on the
IAQI deviation from the IAQS. The IAQ minimum
position is then compared against the user configured
S If PremierLink controller is in the occupied mode and
ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for No and there
is a heat or cool demand (fan auto mode)
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S If the PremierLink controller is in the occupied mode and
ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for Yes when
Linkage is active and the Linkage Coordinator device is
sending an occupied mode flag
If all of the above conditions are met, the CCSR will be
calculated, otherwise it is set to its maximum value and
DX stages is set to 0. If only the last condition is not true
and an economizer is available, it will be used to cool the
space.
S When Temperature Compensated Start is active
S When Free Cool is active
The submaster loop uses the CCSR compared to the actual
SAT to determine the required number of capacity stages
to satisfy the load. There is a programmable minimum
internal time delay of 3 to 5 minutes on and 2 to 5 minutes
off for the compressors to prevent short cycling. There is
also a 3-minute time delay before bringing on the second
stage compressor. If the PremierLink controller is
configured for Heat Pump and AUXOUT is configured for
Reversing Valve Cool, the H3_EX_RV output will
energize 2 seconds after the first compressor is energized
and stay energized until there is a demand for heat. If
AUXOUT is configured for Reversing Valve Heat, then
the H3_EX_RV contact will be deenergized when there is
a demand for cooling. An internal 5 to 10-minute
user-programmable time guard between modes prevents
rapid cycling between modes when used in a single zone
application. The Time Guard is lowered to 3 minutes
when Linkage is active to allow the 3Vt linkage
coordinator to have better control of the PremierLink
controller when used as the air source for the 3V control
system.
S When Pre-Occupancy Purge is active
S Whenever there is a demand for cooling or heating in the
unoccupied mode
S Whenever the Remote Contact input is configured for
Remote Contact (RC_DC=1 in SERVICE table) and it is
closed or the point is forced Closed via communications
in the STATUS01 points display table (remote contact
closed = occupied, remote contact open = unoccupied)
S Whenever the H3_EX_RV point is configured for
Dehumidification (AUXOUT=5 in CONFIG table) and it
is in the unoccupied mode and the indoor RH exceeds the
unoccupied humidity setpoint
S Whenever the Supply Fan Relay point is forced On in the
STATUS01 points display table
The fan will also continue to run as long as compressors
are on when transitioning from occupied to unoccupied
with the exception of Fire Shutdown mode. If the Fire
Shutdown input point is closed or forced in the
STATUS01 points display table, the fan will be shutdown
immediately regardless of the occupancy state or demand.
Table 29 indicates the number of stages available. The
staging algorithm looks at the number of stages available
based the number of cool stages configured in the
SERVICE configuration table. The algorithm will skip the
economizer if it is not available and turn on a compressor.
The PremierLink controller has an optional Supply Fan
Status input to provide proof of airflow. If this is enabled,
the point will look for a contact closure whenever the
Supply Fan Relay is on. If the input is not enabled, then it
will always be the same state as the Supply Fan Relay.
The cooling, economizer and heating routines will use this
input point for fan status.
Table 29 – Available Cooling Stages
NUMBER OF
STAGES
1
0
2
3
(ECONOMIZER*)
Cooling — The compressors are controlled by the Cooling
Control Loop that is used to calculate the desired SAT
needed to satisfy the space. It will compare the SPT to the
Occupied Cool Setpoint (OCSP) + the T56 slider offset
(STO) when occupied and the Unoccupied Cool Setpoint
(UCSP + Unoccupied Cooling Deadband) if unoccupied
to calculate a Cooling Submaster Reference (CCSR) that
is then used by the staging algorithm (Cooling submaster
loop) to calculate the required number of cooling stages.
The economizer, if available, will be used as the first
stage of cooling in addition to the compressors. This loop
runs every minute. The following conditions must be met
in order for this algorithm to run:
Compressor 1
Compressor 2
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
*
If conditions are suitable for economizer operation.
Any time the compressors are running, the PremierLink
controller will lockout the compressors if the SAT
becomes too low. These user configurable settings are
found in the SERVICE configuration table:
Compressor 1 Lockout at SAT < SATLO1 (50 to 65_F)
(default is 55_F)
Compressor 2 Lockout at SAT < SATLO2 (45 to 55_F)
(default is 50_F)
After a compressor is locked out, it may be started again
after a normal time-guard period and the supply air
temperature has increased at least 8_F above the lockout
setpoint.
S indoor fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds
S heat mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S mode is occupied or the Temperature Compensated Start
Dehumidification — The PremierLink controller will
provide occupied and unoccupied dehumidification
control when AUXOUT = 5 in the CONFIG table and is
installed on HVAC units that are equipped with additional
controls and accessories to accomplish this function. This
function also requires a space relative humidity sensor be
installed on the OAQ/IRH input.
or Cool mode is active
S SPT reading is available and > (OCSP + STO)
S If mode is unoccupied and the SPT > (UCSP +
Unoccupied Cooling Deadband). The indoor fan will be
turned on by the staging algorithm.
S OAT > DXLOCK or OAT DX Lockout is disabled
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When in the occupied mode and the indoor relative
humidity is greater then the Occupied High Humidity
setpoint, then the H3_EX_RV output point will be
energized. When in the unoccupied mode and indoor
relative humidity is greater then the Unoccupied High
Humidity setpoint, then the H3_EX_RV output point and
supply fan output will be energized. There is a fixed 5%
hysteresis that the indoor relative humidity must drop
below the active setpoint to end the dehumidification
mode and deenergize the H3_EX_RV output. If the
PremierLink controller is in the unoccupied mode, then
the fan relay will deenergize if there is no other mode
requiring to the fan to be on. This function will not
energize mechanical cooling as a result of the indoor
relative humidity exceeding either setpoint.
The actual damper position (ECONPOS) is the result of
the following calculation. Values represented in the right
side of the equation can be found in the SERVICE
configuration table descriptions in this manual. Note that
that the OAT is taken into consideration to avoid large
changes in damper position when the OAT is cold:
ECONPOS = SubGain x (ECONSR-SAT) + CTRVAL
where SubGain = (OAT - TEMPBAND) / (ESG + 1)
If the OAT < DXLOCK (DX Cool Lockout setpoint) then
the damper will be modulated to maintain the SAT at the
ECONSR value.
If the OAT is between DXLOCK and 68_F (DXLOCK <
OAT < 68_F) and additional cooling is required, the
economizer will close the to minimum position for three
minutes, the economizer integrator will then be reset to 0
and begin modulating to maintain the SASP after the stage
has been energized for about 90 seconds. This will allow
the economizer to calculate a new ECONSR that takes
into account the cooling effect that has just been turned on
and not return to the value require before the cooling was
added. This will prevent the economizer from causing
premature off cycles of compressors while maintaining the
low SAT temperature setpoint for the number of stages
active. In addition to preventing compressor short cycling,
by using return air across the evaporator coil just after the
compressor has started allows for increased refrigerant
flow rates providing for better oil return of any oil washed
out during compressor start-up.
A high humidity alarm will be generated if the indoor
relative humidity exceeds the high humidity setpoint by
the amount configured in the Control Humidity Hysteresis
in the ALARMS table for 20 minutes. The alarm will
return to normal when the indoor relative humidity drops
3% below the active humidity setpoint.
Economizer — The economizer dampers are used to
provide free cooling and indoor air quality if optional CO2
sensor is installed and when the outside conditions are
suitable. Temperature control is accomplished by
controlling the SAT to a certain level determined by the
Economizer PID Loop by calculating a submaster
reference (ECONSR) value. This algorithm will calculate
the submaster reference temperature (ECONSR) based on
OAT and enthalpy conditions and cooling requirements.
The ECONSR value is then passed to the Economizer
Submaster Loop, which will modulate dampers to
maintain SAT at ECONSR level.
If the OAT > 68_F and OAT < SPT and the number of DX
stages requested is > 0 by the staging algorithm, then
ECONSR is set to its minimum value 48_F and the
damper will go to 100% open.
The following conditions are required to determine if
economizer cooling is possible:
If the Auxiliary Relay is configured for exhaust fan
(AUXOUT = 1) in the CONFIG configuration table and
Continuous Power Exhaust (MODPE) is Enable in the
SERVICE configuration table, then the AUXO output
(HS3) will be energized whenever the PremierLink
controller is in the occupied mode. If the MODPE is
disabled then AUXO output will be energized based on
the Power Exhaust Setpoint (PES) in the SETPOINT
table.
S Indoor fan has been on for at least 30 seconds
S Enthalpy is low
S SAT reading is available
S OAT reading is available
S SPT reading is available
S OAT ≤ SPT
Heating — The heat stages are controlled by the Heating
Control Loop, which is used to calculate the desired SAT
needed to satisfy the space. It will compare the SPT to the
Occupied Heat Setpoint (OHSP) + the T56 slider offset
(STO) when occupied and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint
(UHSP - Unoccupied Heating Deadband) if unoccupied to
calculate a Staged Heat Submaster Reference (SHSR).
The heat staging algorithm compares the SHSR to the
actual SAT to calculate the required number of heating
stages to satisfy the load. This loop runs every 40 seconds.
The following conditions must be met in order for this
algorithm to run:
S OAT < OATMAX (OATMAX default is 75_F)
S Economizer position is NOT forced
If any of the above conditions are not met, the ECONSR
will be set to its MAX limit of 120_F and the damper will
go to its configured minimum position. The minimum
damper position can be overridden by the IAQ routine
described later in this section.
The calculation for ECONSR is as follows:
ECONSR = PID function on (setpoint - SPT), where:
setpoint = ((OCSP+STO) + (OHSP+STO))/2 when
NTLO (Unoccupied Free Cool OAT Lockout) < OAT <
68_F
setpoint = (OCSP+STO) - 1 when OAT ≤ NTLO
setpoint = (OHSP+STO) + 1 when OAT ≥ 68_F
S Indoor fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.
S Cool mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S Mode is occupied or the Temperature Compensated Start
or Heat mode is active.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S SPT reading is available and < (OHSP + STO).
S an IAQ sensor is installed
S If it is unoccupied and the SPT < (UHSP - Unoccupied
Heating Deadband). The indoor fan will be turn on by the
staging algorithm.
S the IAQ Minimum Damper Position > minimum damper
position
S and the SAT < SPT -10_F.
When all of the above conditions are met, the SHSR is
calculated and up to 3 stages of heat will turned on and off
to satisfy to maintain the SAT = SHSR. If any of the
above conditions are not met, the SHSR is set to its
minimum value of 35_F.
There is also a SAT tempering routine that will act as SAT
low limit safety to prevent the SAT from becoming too
cold should the economizer fail to close. One stage of
heating will be energized if it is not in the Cooling or Free
Cooling mode and the OAT is below 55_F and the SAT is
below 40_F. It will deenergize when the SAT > (SPT +
10_F).
The Staged Heat Submaster Reference (SHSR) is
calculated as follows:
Indoor Air Quality — If the optional indoor air quality
(IAQI) sensor is installed, the PremierLink controller will
maintain indoor air quality within the space at the user
configured differential setpoint (IAQD) in the CONFIG
configuration table. The setpoint is the difference between
the IAQI and an optional outdoor air quality sensor
(OAQ). If the OAQ is not present then a fixed value of
400 ppm is used. The actual space IAQ setpoint (IAQS) is
calculated as follows:
SHSR = Heating PID function on (error) where error =
(OHSP + STO) - Space Temperature
The Maximum SHSR is determined by the SATHI
configuration. If the supply-air temperature exceeds the
SATHI configuration value, then the heat stages will turn
off. Heat staging will resume after a delay to allow the
supply-air temperature to drop below the SATHI value.
The maximum number of stages available is dependent on
the type of heat and the number of stages programmed in
the CONFIG and SERVICE configuration tables. Staging
will occur as follows for gas electric units, Carrier heat
pumps with a defrost board, or cooling units with electric
heat:
IAQS = IAQD + OAQ (OAQ = 400 ppm if not present)
As air quality within the space changes, the minimum
position of the economizer damper will be changed also
thus allowing more or less outdoor air into the space
depending on the relationship of the IAQI to the IAQS.
The IAQ algorithm runs every 30 seconds and calculates
IAQ minimum position value using a PID loop on the
IAQI deviation from the IAQS. The IAQ minimum
position is then compared against the user configured
minimum position (MDP) and the greatest value becomes
the final minimum damper position (IQMP). If the
calculated IAQ minimum position is greater than the IAQ
maximum damper position (IAQMAXP) decision in the
SERVICE configuration table, then it will be clamped to
IAQMAXP value.
For Heating PID STAGES = 2
HEAT STAGES = 1 (50% capacity) - energize HS1.
HEAT STAGES = 2 (100% capacity) - energize HS2.
For Heating PID STAGES = 3 and AUXOUT = HS3
HEAT STAGES = 1 (33% capacity if) - energize HS1
HEAT STAGES = 2 (66% capacity) - energize HS2
HEAT STAGES = 3 (100% capacity) - energize HS3
Staging will occur as follows For heat pump units with
AUXOUT configured as reversing valve:
If IAQ is configured for low priority, the positioning of
the economizer damper can be overridden by comfort
requirements. If the SPT > OCSP + 2.5 or the SPT <
OHSP - 2.5 then IAQ minimum position becomes 0 and
the IQMP = MDP. The IAQ mode will resume when the
SPT ≤ OCSP + 1.0 and SPT ≥ OHSP - 1.0.
For Heating PID STAGES = 2 and AUXOUT = Reversing
Valve Heat (the H3_EX_RV output will stay energized
until there is a cool demand) HEAT STAGES = 1 (50%
capacity) shall energize CMP1, CMP2, RVS.
HEAT STAGES = 2 (100% capacity) shall energize HS1
and HS2.
If IAQ is configured for high priority and the OAT < 55_F
and the SAT < (SPT - 10_F), the algorithm will enable the
heat stages to maintain the SAT between the SPT and the
SPT + 10_F.
Heating PID STAGES = 3 and AUXOUT = Reversing
Valve Heat (the H3_EX_RV output will stay energized
until there is a cool demand)
HEAT STAGES = 1 (33% capacity if) shall energize
CMP1, CMP2, RVS
IAQ Pre-Occupancy Purge — This function is designed to
purge the space of airborne contaminants that may have
accumulated 2 hours prior to the beginning of the next
occupied period. The maximum damper position that will
be used is temperature compensated for cold whether
conditions and can be pre-empted by Temperature
Compensated Start function. For pre-occupancy to occur,
the following conditions must be met:
HEAT STAGES = 2 (66% capacity) shall energize HS1
HEAT STAGES = 3 (100% capacity) shall energize HS2
If AUXOUT is configured for Reversing Valve Cool, then
the H3_EX_RV contact will be deenergized when there is
a demand for heating. The heat stages will be cycled to
temper the SAT so that it will be between the SPT and the
SPT + 10_F (SPT < SAT < (SPT + 10_F)) if:
S IAQ Pre -Occupancy Purge option is enabled in the
CONFIG configuration table
S Unit is in the unoccupied state
S Current Time is valid
S the number of heat stages calculated is zero
S the OAT < 55_F
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S Next Occupied Time is valid
SPT > (NTSP + 2_F) and SPT > (OAT + 8_F)
The Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be stopped when:
SPT < NTSP or SPT < (OAT + 3_F)
S Time is within 2 hours of next Occupied period
S Time is within Purge Duration (user-defined 5 to 60
minutes in the CONFIG configuration table)
Temperature Compensated Start — This function will run
when the controller is in unoccupied state and will
calculate early start bias time (SBT) based on space
temperature deviation from occupied setpoints in minutes
per degree. The following conditions will be met for the
function to run:
S OAT Reading is available
If all of the above conditions are met, the economizer
damper IQMP is temporarily overridden by the
pre-occupancy damper position (PURGEMP). The
PURGEMP will be set to one of the following conditions
based on atmospheric conditions and the space
temperature:
S Unit is in unoccupied state
S Next occupied time is valid
S Current time of day is valid
S If the OAT ≥ NTLO (Unoccupied OAT Lockout
Temperature) and OAT < 65_F and OAT is less than or
equal to OCSP and Enthalpy = Low then PURGEMP =
100%.
S Valid space temperature reading is available (from sensor
or linkage thermostat)
S Cool Start Bias (KCOOL) and Heat Bias Start (KHEAT)
> 0 in the CONFIG configuration table
S If the OAT < NTLO then PURGEMP = LTMP (Low
Temperature Minimum Position - defaults to 10%)
The SBT is calculated by one of the following formulas
depending on temperature demand:
S If the OAT > 65_F or (OAT ≥ NTLO and OAT > OCSP)
or Enthalpy = High then PURGEMP = HTMP (High
Temperature Minimum Position defaults to 35%).
If SPT > OCSP then SBT = (SPT - OCSP) * KCOOL
If SPT < OHSP then SPT = (OHSP - SPT) * KHEAT.
The LTMP and HTMP are user adjustable values from 0
to 100% in the SETPOINT table. Whenever PURGEMP
The calculated start bias time can range from 0 to 255
minutes. When SBT is greater than 0 the function will
subtract the SBT from the next occupied time to calculate
a new start time. When a new start time is reached, the
Temperature Compensated Start mode is started. This
mode energizes the fan and the unit will operate as though
it is in occupied state. Once set, Temperature
Compensated Start mode will stay on until the unit returns
to occupied state. If either Unoccupied Free Cool or IAQ
Pre-Occupancy mode is active when Temperature
Compensated Start begins, their mode will end.
results in
a
number greater than 0%, the IAQ
pre-occupancy purge mode will be enabled turning on the
Indoor Fan Relay and setting the economizer IQMP to the
PURGEMP value. When IAQ pre-occupancy mode is not
active PURGEMP = 0%.
Unoccupied Free Cooling — Unoccupied free cool
function will start the indoor fan during unoccupied times
in order to cool the space with outside air. This function is
performed to delay the need for mechanical cooling when
the system enters the occupied period. Depending on how
Unoccupied Free Cooling is configured, unoccupied mode
can occur at any time in the unoccupied time period or 2
to 6 hours prior to the next occupied time. Once the space
has been sufficiently cooled during this cycle, the fan will
be stopped. In order to perform unoccupied free cooling
all of the following conditions must be met:
Door Switch — The Door Switch function is designed to
disable mechanical heating and cooling outputs when the
REMOCC contact input is closed (in the ON state) after a
programmed time delay. The fan will continue to operate
based on the current mode and the ASHRAE 90.1 Supply
Fan setting. The delay is programmable from 2 to 20
minutes by setting the Remote Cont/Door Switch decision
in the SERVICE table to a value equal to the number of
minutes desired. When the contact is open (in the OFF
state), the PremierLink controller will resume normal
temperature control.
S NTEN option is enabled in the CONFIG configuration
table
S Unit is in unoccupied state
S Current time of day is valid
S Temperature Compensated Start mode is not active
S COOL mode is not active
S HEAT mode is not active
S SPT reading is available
This application is designed for use in schools or other
public places where a door switch can be installed to
monitor the opening of a door for an extended period of
time. The controller will disable mechanical cooling and
heating when the door is open for a programmed amount
of time.
S OAT reading is available
S Enthalpy is low
This function can also be used to monitor a high
condensate level switch when installed on a water source
heat pump to disable mechanic cooling in case of a
plugged evaporator condensate pan drain.
Linkage — The Linkage function in the PremierLink
controller is available for applications using a Linkage
thermostat or the 3V control system. If using the Linkage
thermostat, both the PremierLink controller and the stat
must be on the same CCN bus. When used as the air
S OAT > NTLO (with 1_F hysteresis) and < Max Free Cool
setpoint
If any of the above conditions are not met, Unoccupied
Free Cool mode will be stopped, otherwise, the mode will
be controlled as follows:
The NTFC setpoint (NTSP) is determined as NTSP =
(OCSP + OHSP) / 2
The Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be started when:
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
source for a 3V control system, the PremierLink controller
is not required to be on the same CCN bus but it is
recommended. Linkage will be active when it is initiated
from the Linkage thermostat or the 3V Linkage
Coordinator through CCN communications and requires
no configuration. Only one device can be linked to the
PremierLink controller.
For more information on how the PremierLink controller
is used in conjunction with the Carrier 3V control system,
contact your CCN controls representative.
IMPORTANT: The PremierLink controller should not be
used as a linked air source in a ComfortIDt VAV system.
The ComfortID VAV system will NOT function correctly
when applied with a PremierLink controller as the air
source, resulting in poor comfort control and possible
equipment malfunction.
NOTE: The PremierLink controller can be used as an air
source in a 3V Pressure Independent (PI) System (a 3V
Linkage Coordinator with ComfortID PI Zone
Controllers), but it should not be used as an air source
with ComfortID controllers unless a 3V zone controller is
used as the Linkage Coordinator. Contact your Carrier
CCN controls representative for assistance.
Once Linkage is active, the PremierLink controller’s own
SPT, temperature setpoints, and occupancy are ignored
and the controller will use the information provided by the
remote linkage device. The following information will be
received from the remote linked device and can be viewed
in the maintenance display table:
S Supervisory Element
S Supervisory Bus
S Supervisory Block
Demand Limit — If the demand limit option is enabled,
the control will receive and accept Redline Alert and
Loadshed commands from the CCN loadshed controller.
When a redline alert is received, the control will set the
maximum stage of capacity equal to the stage of capacity
that the unit is operating at when the redline alert was
initiated.
S Average Occupied Heat Setpoint
S Average Occupied Cool Setpoint
S Average Unoccupied Heat Setpoint
S Average Unoccupied Cool Setpoint
S Average Zone Temp
S Average Occupied Zone Temp
S Occupancy Status
When loadshed command is received the control will
reduce capacity as shown in Table 31.
In return, the PremierLink controller will provide its SAT
and operating mode to the linked device.
Table 31 – Loadshed Command — Gas and Electric
Heat Units
It will convert its operating modes to Linkage modes. See
Table 30.
CURRENT CAPACITY
CMP1
NEW CAPACITY
DX Cooling OFF
CMP1
Table 30 – Linkage Modes
CMP1+CMP2
HS1
ROOFTOP MODE
Demand Limit
Heat
VALUE
N/A
3
LINKAGE MODE
N/A
Heat OFF
HS1+HS2 (+HS3)
HS1
Heating
Cooling
N/A
The controller will have a maximum demand limit timer
of 1 hour that prevents the unit from staying in load shed
or redline alert longer than 1 hour in the event the
controller loses communication with the network load
shed module. Should the maximum demand limit timer
expire prior to receiving the loadshed device command
from CCN, the control will stop demand limit mode and
return to normal operation.
Cool or Free Cooling
IAQ Control
4
N/A
Temp. Compensated
Start Heat
2
Warm ---up
Temp. Compensated
Start Cool
IAQ Purge
Occupied
(Indoor Fan ON)
4
6
4
Cooling
Pressurization
Cooling
RTU--MP Sequence of Operation
Unoccupied Free
Cool
Unoccupied Free
Cooling
The RTU-MP will control the compressor, economizer
and heating outputs based on its own space temperature
input and setpoints. An optional CO2 IAQ sensor mounted
in the space can influence the economizer minimum
position. The RTU-MP has its own hardware clock that is
set automatically when the software is installed on the
board. The RTU-MP’s default is to control to occupied
setpoints all the time, until a type of occupancy control is
set. Occupancy types are described in the scheduling
section. The following sections describe the operation for
the functions of the RTU-MP. All point objects that are
referred to in this sequence will be in reference to the
objects as viewed in BACview6 Handheld.
5
Fire Shutdown
Factory/Field Test
Off
7
1
1
Evac
Off
Off
The PremierLink controller will generate a Linkage
Communication Failure alarm if a failure occurs for 5
consecutive minutes once a Linkage has previously been
established. It will then revert back to its own SPT,
setpoints and occupancy schedule for control. For this
reason, Carrier strongly recommends that an SPT be
installed in the space on open plenum systems or in the
return air duct of ducted return air systems to provide
Scheduling
continued
backup
operation.
When
Linkage
communication is restored, the controller will generate a
return to normal.
Scheduling is used to start heating or cooling (become
occupied) based upon a day of week and a time period and
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
control to the occupied heating or cooling setpoints.
Scheduling functions are located under occupancy
determination and the schedule menu accessed by the
Menu softkey (see Appendix - for menu structure). Your
local time and date should be set for these functions to
operate properly. Five scheduling functions are available
by changing the Occupancy Source to one of the
following selections:
BAS On/Off
The Building Automation System is scheduling the unit
via an On/Off command to the BAS ON/OFF software
point. The Building Automation System can be speaking
BACnet, Modbus, or N2 and is writing to the BAS On/Off
point in the open protocol point map.
NOTE:
If the BAS supports NATIVE BACnet
scheduling, then set the Occupancy Source to BACnet
schedule. If the BAS is BACnet but does NOT support
NATIVE BACnet scheduling, then set the Occupancy
Source to BAS On/Off.
Always Occupied (Default Occupancy)
The unit will run continuously. RTU-MP ships from the
factory with this setting.
Local Schedule
DI On/Off
The unit will operate according to the schedule configured
and stored in the unit. The local schedule is made up of
three hierarchy levels that consist of two Override
schedules, twelve Holiday and four Daily schedules, and
are only accessible by the BACview screen (handheld or
virtual).
A hard-wired input on the RTU-MP will command the
unit to start/stop. Inputs 3, 5, 8, and 9 on plug J5 can be
hard-wired to command the unit to start/stop.
NOTE: Scheduling can either be controlled via the unit
or the BAS, but NOT both.
Indoor Fan
The Daily schedule is the lowest schedule in the hierarchy
and is overridden by both the Holiday and Override
schedule. It consists of a start time, a stop time (both in 24
hour mode) and the seven days of the week, starting with
Monday and ending in Sunday. To select a daily schedule
scroll to the Schedules menu off of the Menu selection.
Enter the User password and change the Occupancy
Source to Local Schedule. Scroll down and over to the
Daily menu and press enter. Choose one of the four Daily
schedules by pressing the Next softkey and change the
Use? point from NO to YES by selecting the point and
pressing the INCR or DECR softkey. Press the OK softkey
and scroll to the start and stop times. Edit these times
following the same steps as the Use? point. Finally scroll
down to the Days: section and highlight the days required
for the Daily schedule by INCR or DECR softkeys and
press OK softkey.
The Holiday schedule is created to override the Daily
schedule and identify a specific day and month of the year
to start and stop the unit and change control to the
unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. Follow the
same steps to turn on one of the twelve Holiday schedules
and start and stop times. Next, select one out of the twelve
months and one out of the thirty-one days of that month.
The RTU-MP will now ignore the Daily schedule for the
specific day and time you selected and follow the Holiday
Schedule for this period.
The indoor fan will be turned on whenever any one of the
following conditions is true:
S It is in the occupied mode. This will be determined by its
own internal occupancy schedule.
S Whenever there is a demand for cooling or heating in the
unoccupied mode.
S Whenever the remote occupancy switch is closed during
DI On/Off schedule type or if occupancy is forced
occupied by the BAS during BAS On/Off schedule type.
When transitioning from unoccupied to occupied, there
will be a configured time delay of 5 to 600 seconds before
starting the fan. The fan will continue to run as long as
compressors, heating stages, or the dehumidification
relays are on when transitioning from occupied to
unoccupied with the exception of Shutdown mode. If Fire
Shutdown, safety chain, SAT alarm or SPT alarm are
active; the fan will be shutdown immediately regardless of
the occupancy state or demand.
The RTU-MP has an optional Supply Fan Status input to
provide proof of airflow. If this is enabled, the point will
look for a contact closure whenever the Supply Fan Relay
is on. If it is not enabled then it will always be the same
state as the Supply Fan Relay. The cooling, economizer,
heating, dehumidification, CO2 and power exhaust
routines will use this input point for fan status.
Cooling
The Override schedules primary purpose is to provide a
temporary change in the occupied heating and cooling
setpoints and force the unit to control to the unoccupied
heating and cooling setpoints. This would occur on a set
day in a particular month and last during the start and stop
time configured. The Override schedule is enabled by
following the same steps to create the Holiday schedule.
The compressor outputs are controlled by the Cooling
Control PID Loop and Cooling Stages Capacity algorithm.
They will be used to calculate the desired number of
stages needed to satisfy the space by comparing the Space
Temperature (SPT) to the Occupied Cool Setpoint plus the
T56 slider offset when occupied and the Unoccupied Cool
Setpoint (UCSP) plus the T56 slider offset, if unoccupied.
The economizer, if available, will be used for cooling in
addition to the compressors. The following conditions
must be true in order for this algorithm to run:
NOTE: Push button override is only available when
running a local or BACnet Schedule.
BACnet Schedule
For use with a Building Automation System that supports
native BACnet scheduling is scheduling the unit. With the
Occupancy Source set to BACnet schedule the BAS will
control the unit through network communication and it’s
own scheduling function.
S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.
S Heat mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S If occupied and the SPT >(occupied cool setpoint plus
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the T56 slider offset).
configured for continuous occupied operation, it will be
energized whenever the controller is in the occupied mode
and disabled when in the unoccupied mode. If configured
for damper position control, it will be energized whenever
the economizer exceeds the power exhaust setpoint and
disabled when the economizer drops below the setpoint by
a fixed hysteresis of 10%.
S Space Temperature reading is available.
S If it is unoccupied and the SPT > (unoccupied cool
setpoint plus the T56 slider offset). The indoor fan will be
turned on by the staging algorithm.
S If economizer is available and active and economizer
open > 85% and SAT > (SAT low limit + 5_F) and SPT >
effective setpoint + 0.5_F.
Heating
OR
The heating outputs are controlled by the Heating Control
PID Loop and Heating Stages Capacity algorithm. They
will be used to calculate the desired number of stages
needed to satisfy the space by comparing the SPT to the
Occupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56 slider offset when
occupied and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56
slider offset if unoccupied. The following conditions must
be true in order for this algorithm to run:
Economizer is available, but not active
OR
Economizer is not available
S OAT > DX Lockout temperature.
If all of the above conditions are met, the compressors
will be energized as required, otherwise they will be
de-energized.
There is a fixed 3-minute minimum on time and a
5-minute off time for each compressor output and a
3-minute minimum time delay between staging up or
down.
Any time the compressors are running the RTU-MP will
stage down the compressors if the SAT becomes less than
the cooling low supply air setpoint.
After a compressor is staged off, it may be started again
after a normal time-guard period and the supply air
temperature has increased above the low supply air
setpoint.
S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.
S Cool mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S If occupied and SPT <(occupied heat setpoint plus T56
slider offset)
S SPT reading is available
S If it is unoccupied and the SPT < (unoccupied heat
setpoint plus T56 slider offset). The indoor fan will be
turned on by the staging algorithm.
S OAT < High OAT lockout temperature.
If all of the above conditions are met, the heating outputs
will be energized as required, otherwise they will be
de-energized. If the SAT begins to exceed the high supply
air setpoint, a ramping function will cause the Heat Stages
Capacity algorithm to decrease the number of stages until
the SAT has dropped below the setpoint.
There is a fixed one minute minimum on time and a one
minute off time for each heat output. Heat staging has a 3
minute stage up and 30 second stage down delay.
Economizer
The Economizer dampers are used to provide free cooling
and Indoor Air Quality, if optional CO2 sensor is installed,
when the outside conditions are suitable.
The following conditions must be true for economizer
operation:
S Indoor Fan has been on for at least 30 seconds.
S Enthalpy is Low if the Enthalpy input is enabled.
S SAT reading is available.
Indoor Air Quality
If the optional indoor air quality sensor is installed, the
RTU-MP will maintain indoor air quality within the space
at the user configured differential setpoint. The setpoint is
the difference between the indoor air quality and an
optional outdoor air quality sensor. If the outdoor air
quality is not present then a fixed value of 400ppm is
used. The following conditions must be true in order for
this algorithm to run:
S OAT reading is available.
S SPT reading is available.
S OAT <= High OAT economizer lockout configuration
(default = 75).
S OAT <= SPT
If any of the mentioned conditions are not true, the
economizer will be set to its configured minimum
position. The minimum damper position can be
overridden by the IAQ routine described later in this
section.
If the above conditions are true, the Economizer Control
Master Loop will calculate a damper position value based
on the following calculation:
Damper Position = minimum position + PID (SPT - econ
setpoint). Econ setpoint is half way between the effective
cool and heat setpoints. If the SAT drops below the
cooling low supply air setpoint (+ 5_F), the economizer
will ramp down to minimum position.
S The mode is occupied.
S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.
S Indoor Air Quality sensor has a valid reading
As air quality within the space changes, the minimum
position of the economizer damper will be changed thus
allowing more or less outdoor air into the space depending
on the relationship of the indoor air quality to the
differential setpoint. If all the above conditions are true,
the IAQ algorithm will run and calculates an IAQ
minimum position value using a PID loop. The IAQ
minimum damper position is then compared against the
user configured economizer minimum position and the
greatest value becomes the final minimum damper
position of the economizer output.
Power Exhaust
If RTU-MP is also controlling an exhaust fan, it can be
enabled based on damper position or by occupancy. If
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the calculated IAQ minimum position is greater than
the IAQ maximum damper position configuration then it
will be clamped to the configured value.
heating and cooling setpoints by the configured demand
limit setpoint value and remain in effect until the BACnet
demand limit variable receives a 0 value.
Demand Limit
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES
If the RTU-MP receives a level 1 (one degree offset), 2
(two degree offset), or a 3 (4 degree offset) to the BACnet
demand limit variable, the controller will expand the
See Table 32 for torque values.
Table 32 – Torque Values
Supply fan motor mounting
Supply fan motor adjustment plate
Motor pulley setscrew
120 + / --- 12 in --- lb s
120 + / --- 12 in --- lb s
72+/--- 5 in---lbs
72+/--- 5 in---lbs
72+/--- 5 in---lbs
65 --- 70 in --- lb s
65 --- 75 in --- lb s
20 + / --- 2 in --- lb s
84 + / --- 12 in --- lb s
Fan pulley setscrew
Blower wheel hub setscrew
Bearing locking collar setscrew
Compressor mounting bolts
Condenser fan motor mounting bolts
Condenser fan hub setscrew
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE
Model Number Nomenclature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4
8
T
C D A
0
4
A
1
A
5
--
0
A
0
A
0
____
____
____
Unit Heat Type
48 = Gas heat pkg rooftop
Brand / Packaging
0 = Standard
1 = LTL
Tier / Model
TC = Entry tier (with Puron refrigerant)
Electrical Options
A = None
Heat Size
C = N o n --- f u se d d isc
D = Thru the base
F = Non---fused & thru the base
D = Low heat
E = Medium heat
F = High heat
L = Low NO , low heat
Service Options
x
M = Low NO , medium heat
0 = None
x
N = Low NO , high heat
1 = Unpowered convenience outlet
2 = Powered convenience outlet
x
S = Stainless steel, low heat
R = Stainless steel, medium heat
T = Stainless steel, high heat
Intake / Exhaust Options
A = None
Refrig. System Options
A = Standard refrigeration system
B = Temp econo w/ baro relief
F = Enthalpy econo w/ baro relief
Base Unit Controls
0 = Electromechanical
Cooling Tons
04 = 3 Ton
05 = 4 Ton
06 = 5 Ton
07 = 6 Ton
08 = 7.5 Ton
09 = 8.5 Ton
12 = 10 Ton
1 = PremierLink DDC controller
2 = RTU---MP multi protocol controller
Design Rev
Factory assigned
Sensor Options
A = None
Voltage
B = RA smoke detector
C = SA smoke detector
1 = 575/3/60
3 = 208---230/1/60
5 = 208---230/3/60
6 = 460/3/60
D = RA & SA smoke detector
1
E = CO sensor
2
1
F = RA smoke detector & CO
G = SA smoke detector & CO
H = RA & SA smoke detector & CO
2
1
Coil Options (Outdoor Coil --- Indoor Coil)
A = Al/Cu --- Al/Cu
2
1
2
B = P r e co a t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u
C = E co a t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u
Indoor Fan Options
D = E coat Al/Cu --- E coat Al/Cu
E = Cu/Cu --- Al/Cu
F = Cu/Cu --- Cu/Cu
M = A l/ C u --- A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
N = P r e co a t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
P = E co a t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
Q = E co a t A l/ C u --- E co a t A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
R = C u / C u --- A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
S = C u / C u --- C u / C u --- L o u v e r e d H a il G u a r d s
1 = Standard static option
2 = Medium static option
3 = High static option
1
Future availability
Serial Number Format
POSITION NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TYPICAL
1
2
0
8
G
1
2
3
4
6
POSITION
1---2
DESIGNATES
Week of manufacture (fiscal calendar
Year of manufacture (“08” = 2008)
3---4
5
Manufacturing location (G = ETP, Texas, USA)
Sequential number
6---10
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA
3 -- 6 TONS
Physical Data (Cooling)
48TC*A04
48TC*A05
48TC*A06
48TC*A07
Refrigeration System
# Circuits / # Comp. / Type
Puron (R---410a) charge A/B (lbs)
Oil A/B (oz)
1 / 1 / Scroll
5.6
1 / 1 / Scroll
8.5
1 / 1 / Scroll
10.7
1 / 1 / Scroll
14.1
25
42
42
56
Metering Device
High---press. Trip / Reset (psig)
Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig)
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Evap. Coil
Material
Coil type
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 15
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 15
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
4 / 15
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
4 / 15
Rows / FPI
2
Total Face Area (ft )
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.3
Condensate Drain Conn. Size
3/4”
3/4”
3/4”
3/4”
Evap. Fan and Motor
1 / Belt
1.2
560---854
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
1.2
770---1175
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
---
---
---
---
---
---
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
1.2
560---854
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
RPM Range
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
1.2
560---854
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
1.2
560---854
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
1.2
770---1175
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
2.4
1073---1457
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
RPM Range
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
1.2
770---1175
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
1.2
770---1175
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1 / Belt
1.5
1035---1466
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
---
---
---
---
---
---
RPM Range
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
1.2
1 / Belt
1.2
1 / Belt
2.4
1 / Belt
2.9
RPM Range
770---1175
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
770---1175
48
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1035---1466
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1173---1788
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
2.4
1 / Belt
2.4
1 / Belt
2.9
1 / Belt
3.7
RPM Range
1035---1466
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1035---1466
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1303---1687
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
1474---1788
56
1 / Centrifugal
10 x 10
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Cond. Coil
Material
Coil type
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
1 / 17
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Rows / FPI
2
Total Face Area (ft )
14.6
12.6
16.5
21.3
Cond. fan / motor
Filters
Qty / Motor Drive Type
Motor HP / RPM
1/ Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
1/ Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
1/ Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
1/ Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
Fan diameter (in)
RA Filter # / Size (in)
OA inlet screen # / Size (in)
2 / 16 x 25 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
2 / 16 x 25 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
2 / 16 x 25 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
4 / 16 x 16 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)
7.5 -- 10 TONS
Physical Data (Cooling)
48TC*A08
48TC*A09
48TC*A12
Refrigeration System
# Circuits / # Comp. / Type
Puron (R---410a) charge A/B (lbs)
Oil A/B (oz)
1 / 1 / Scroll
13.75
1 / 1 / Scroll
15.25
1 / 1 / Scroll
20.0
60
85
110
Metering Device
High---press. Trip / Reset (psig)
Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig)
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Acutrol
630 / 505
54 / 117
Evap. Coil
Material
Coil type
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
3 / 15
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
3 / 15
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
4 / 15
Rows / FPI
2
Total Face Area (ft )
8.9
11.1
11.1
Condensate Drain Conn. Size
3/4”
3/4”
3/4”
Evap. Fan and Motor
1 / Belt
1.7
1 / Belt
2.4
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
1.7
RPM Range
489---747
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
518---733
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
591---838
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
2.9
733---949
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
1 / Belt
2.4
690---936
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
1 / Belt
3.7
838---1084
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
RPM Range
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Motor Qty / Drive Type
Max BHP
1 / Belt
5.25
1 / Belt
3.7
1 / Belt
5.25
RPM Range
909---1102
145TY
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
838---1084
56
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
1022---1240
145TY
1 / Centrifugal
15 x 15
Motor Frame Size
Fan Qty / Type
Fan Diameter (in)
Cond. Coil
Material
Coil type
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Cu / Al
3/8” RTPF
2 / 17
Rows / FPI
2
Total Face Area (ft )
20.5
21.4
25.1
Cond. fan / motor
Filters
Qty / Motor Drive Type
Motor HP / RPM
2 / Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
2 / Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
2 / Direct
1/4 / 1100
22
Fan diameter (in)
RA Filter # / Size (in)
OA inlet screen # / Size (in)
4 / 16 x 20 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
4 / 20 x 20 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
4 / 20 x 20 x 2
1 / 20 x 24 x 1
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)
3 -- 6 TONS
Physical Data (Heating)
48TC**04
48TC**05
48TC**06
48TC**07
Gas Connection
# of Gas Valves
1
1
1
1
Connection size
Nat. gas supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG)
LP supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG)
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
5 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
5 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
5 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
5 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
Heat Anticipator Setting (Amps)
1st stage
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
2nd stage
Natural Gas Heat
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
1 / 2
1 / 2
1 / 2
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 / 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
55 / 85
1 / 3
1 / 3
1 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
195 / 115
35 / 65
195 / 115
35 / 65
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
---
---
---
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
Liquid Propane Heat
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
1 / 2
1 / 2
1 / 2
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 / 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
195 / 115
25 --- 55
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
55 / 85
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
---
---
---
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
Low NO Gas Heat
x
# of stages / # of burners (total)
1 / 2
1 / 2
1 / 2
---
---
---
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
195 / 115
20 / 50
195 / 115
20 / 50
195 / 115
20 / 50
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / closes
Temperature rise
1 / 3
1 / 3
1 / 3
---
---
---
195 / 115
30 / 60
195 / 115
30 / 60
195 / 115
30 / 60
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise
---
---
---
1 / 3
1 / 3
---
---
---
195 / 115
40 / 70
195 / 115
40 / 70
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)
7.5 -- 10 TONS
Physical Data (Heating)
48TC**04
48TC**05
48TC**06
48TC**07
Gas Connection
# of Gas Valves
1
1
1
1
Nat. gas supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG)
LP supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG)
4 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
4 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
4 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
4 --- 1 3 / 0 . 1 8 --- 0 . 4 7
11---13 / 0.40---0.47
Heat Anticipator Setting (Amps)
1st stage
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
2nd stage
Natural Gas Heat
Connection size
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 / 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
55 / 85
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
---
---
---
Liquid Propane Heat
Connection size
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 / 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
25 --- 55
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
55 / 85
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
35 / 65
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
1/2” NPT
1 or 2 / 3
195 / 115
50 / 80
---
---
---
Low NO Gas Heat
x
Connection size
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
20 / 50
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
20 / 50
1/2” NPT
1 / 2
195 / 115
20 / 50
1/2” NPT
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
---
---
---
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
30 / 60
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
30 / 60
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
30 / 60
1/2” NPT
---
---
---
Connection size
# of stages / # of burners (total)
Rollout switch opens / Closes
Temperature rise (min/max)
1/2” NPT
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
40 / 70
1/2” NPT
1 / 3
195 / 115
40 / 70
1/2” NPT
---
---
---
---
---
---
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE
General Fan Performance Notes:
1. Interpolation is permissible. Do not extrapolate.
2. External static pressure is the static pressure difference between the return duct and the supply duct plus the static
pressure caused by any FIOPs or accessories.
3. Tabular data accounts for pressure loss due to clean filters, unit casing, and wet coils. Factory options and accessories
may add static pressure losses.
4. The Fan Performance tables offer motor/drive recommendations. In cases when two motor/drive combinations would
work, Carrier recommended the lower horsepower option.
5. For information on the electrical properties of Carrier’s motors, please see the Electrical information section of this
book.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**04
1 Phase
3 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
900
975
553
575
597
620
643
667
691
715
740
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.21
0.23
0.27
0.30
0.34
0.38
681
700
720
741
762
783
805
827
849
0.22
0.25
0.28
0.31
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.47
0.52
782
801
820
839
859
879
900
920
941
0.32
0.35
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.66
870
888
906
925
944
963
983
1002
1023
0.42
0.46
0.49
0.54
0.58
0.63
0.68
0.74
0.80
948
965
983
1001
1020
1038
1057
1076
1096
0.53
0.57
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.76
0.82
0.88
0.95
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
2
Medium Static Option
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
900
975
1019
1036
1053
1071
1089
1107
1126
1144
1163
0.64
0.69
0.74
0.79
0.84
0.90
0.96
1.03
1.10
1084
1101
1118
1135
1153
1171
1189
1208
---
0.76
0.81
0.86
0.92
0.98
1.04
1.11
1.18
---
1146
1162
1179
1196
1213
1231
---
0.89
0.94
1.00
1.06
1.12
1.19
---
1203
1219
1236
1253
---
---
---
---
---
1.02
1.08
1.14
1.20
---
---
---
---
---
1258
1.16
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AG006) and belt (part number KR30AE039).
2. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part number KR11HY161) and belt (part number KR30AE035).
48TC**04
1 Phase
3 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
900
975
567
591
615
641
666
693
719
746
773
0.15
0.17
0.20
0.23
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.38
0.42
688
710
732
755
778
802
826
850
875
0.22
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.37
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.57
786
807
828
849
871
893
916
939
963
0.30
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.47
0.53
0.58
0.64
0.70
871
891
911
931
952
974
995
1017
1040
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.52
0.57
0.63
0.70
0.76
0.84
947
966
985
1005
1025
1046
1067
1088
1110
0.44
0.49
0.55
0.61
0.67
0.74
0.81
0.89
0.96
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
2
Medium Static Option
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
900
975
1016
1034
1053
1073
1093
1113
1133
1154
1175
0.51
0.57
0.63
0.70
0.77
0.85
0.92
1.01
1.09
1080
1098
1116
1135
1155
1174
1194
1215
---
0.57
0.64
0.71
0.79
0.87
0.95
1.03
1.12
---
1139
1157
1176
1194
1213
1232
1252
---
0.64
0.72
0.79
0.87
0.96
1.05
1.14
---
1195
1213
1231
1250
1268
1287
---
0.71
0.79
0.87
0.96
1.05
1.15
---
1249
1266
1284
1302
1321
---
---
---
---
0.77
0.86
0.95
1.04
1.14
---
---
---
---
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AG006) and belt (part number KR30AE039).
2. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part number KR11HY161) and belt (part number KR30AE035).
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**04
3 Phase
3 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
900
975
553
575
597
620
643
667
691
715
740
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.21
0.23
0.27
0.30
0.34
0.38
681
700
720
741
762
783
805
827
849
0.22
0.25
0.28
0.31
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.47
0.52
782
801
820
839
859
879
900
920
941
0.32
0.35
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.66
870
888
906
925
944
963
983
1002
1023
0.42
0.46
0.49
0.54
0.58
0.63
0.68
0.74
0.80
948
965
983
1001
1020
1038
1057
1076
1096
0.53
0.57
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.76
0.82
0.88
0.95
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
900
975
1019
1036
1053
1071
1089
1107
1126
1144
1163
0.64
0.69
0.74
0.79
0.84
0.90
0.96
1.03
1.10
1084
1101
1118
1135
1153
1171
1189
1208
1226
0.76
0.81
0.86
0.92
0.98
1.04
1.11
1.18
1.25
1146
1162
1179
1196
1213
1231
1249
1267
1285
0.89
0.94
1.00
1.06
1.12
1.19
1.26
1.34
1.41
1203
1219
1236
1253
1270
1287
1305
1323
1341
1.02
1.08
1.14
1.20
1.27
1.34
1.42
1.50
1.58
1258
1274
1290
1307
1324
1341
1358
1376
1394
1.16
1.22
1.28
1.35
1.42
1.50
1.58
1.66
1.75
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
1. Recommend using field---supplied drive (part number KR11AG006) and belt (part number KR30AE039)
48TC**04
3 Phase
3 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
900
975
567
591
615
641
666
693
719
746
773
0.15
0.17
0.20
0.23
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.38
0.42
688
710
732
755
778
802
826
850
875
0.22
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.37
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.57
786
807
828
849
871
893
916
939
963
0.30
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.47
0.53
0.58
0.64
0.70
871
891
911
931
952
974
995
1017
1040
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.52
0.57
0.63
0.70
0.76
0.84
947
966
985
1005
1025
1046
1067
1088
1110
0.44
0.49
0.55
0.61
0.67
0.74
0.81
0.89
0.96
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
900
975
1016
1034
1053
1073
1093
1113
1133
1154
1175
0.51
0.57
0.63
0.70
0.77
0.85
0.92
1.01
1.09
1080
1098
1116
1135
1155
1174
1194
1215
1235
0.57
0.64
0.71
0.79
0.87
0.95
1.03
1.12
1.22
1139
1157
1176
1194
1213
1232
1252
1272
1292
0.64
0.72
0.79
0.87
0.96
1.05
1.14
1.24
1.34
1195
1213
1231
1250
1268
1287
1307
1326
1346
0.71
0.79
0.87
0.96
1.05
1.15
1.25
1.35
1.46
1249
1266
1284
1302
1321
1339
1358
1378
1397
0.77
0.86
0.95
1.04
1.14
1.25
1.35
1.46
1.58
1050
1125
1200
1275
1350
1425
1500
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AG006) and belt (part number KR30AE039).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**05
1 Phase
4 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
643
675
707
740
773
807
841
875
910
0.23
0.28
0.33
0.38
0.45
0.52
0.59
0.68
0.77
762
790
819
849
879
910
942
974
1006
0.34
0.40
0.45
0.52
0.59
0.67
0.75
0.85
0.95
859
886
913
941
970
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.66
0.73
0.82
0.91
1.02
1.13
944
969
996
1023
1050
1078
1106
1135
1165
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.80
0.88
0.98
1.08
1.19
1.31
1020
1044
1070
1096
1123
1150
1177
1205
1234
0.71
0.78
0.86
0.95
1.04
1.14
1.25
1.37
1.49
999
1029
1059
1090
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
Medium Static Option
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
1089
1113
1138
1163
1189
---
---
---
---
0.84
0.92
1.01
1.10
1.20
---
---
---
---
1153
1177
1201
---
---
---
---
---
---
0.98
1.06
1.15
---
---
---
---
---
---
1213
1.12
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part number KR11HY161) and belt (part number KR30AE035).
48TC**05
1 Phase
4 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
666
701
737
773
810
847
885
923
962
0.26
0.31
0.36
0.42
0.49
0.57
0.66
0.75
0.85
778
810
842
875
909
943
978
1014
1049
0.37
0.43
0.49
0.57
0.65
0.73
0.83
0.94
1.05
871
901
931
963
994
1027
1060
1093
1127
0.47
0.54
0.62
0.70
0.79
0.89
1.00
1.11
1.24
952
981
0.57
0.65
0.74
0.84
0.94
1.05
1.16
1.29
1.42
1025
1053
1081
1110
1140
1170
1200
1231
1263
0.67
0.76
0.86
0.96
1.08
1.20
1.32
1.46
1.61
1010
1040
1070
1101
1133
1165
1198
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
Medium Static Option
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
1093
1119
1147
1175
---
---
---
---
---
0.77
0.87
0.98
1.09
---
---
---
---
---
1155
1181
1208
---
---
---
---
---
---
0.87
0.98
1.09
---
---
---
---
---
---
1213
1239
0.96
1.08
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1268
1294
1.05
1.18
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1321
1.14
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part number KR11HY161) and belt (part number KR30AE035).
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**05
3 Phase
4 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
643
675
707
740
773
807
841
875
910
0.23
0.28
0.33
0.38
0.45
0.52
0.59
0.68
0.77
762
790
819
849
879
910
942
974
1006
0.34
0.40
0.45
0.52
0.59
0.67
0.75
0.85
0.95
859
886
913
941
970
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.66
0.73
0.82
0.91
1.02
1.13
944
969
996
1023
1050
1078
1106
1135
1165
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.80
0.88
0.98
1.08
1.19
1.31
1020
1044
1070
1096
1123
1150
1177
1205
1234
0.71
0.78
0.86
0.95
1.04
1.14
1.25
1.37
1.49
999
1029
1059
1090
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
1089
1113
1138
1163
1189
1216
1242
1270
1297
0.84
0.92
1.01
1.10
1.20
1.31
1.42
1.55
1.68
1153
1177
1201
1226
1252
1277
1303
1330
1357
0.98
1.06
1.15
1.25
1.36
1.48
1.60
1.73
1.87
1213
1237
1261
1285
1310
1335
1361
1387
1414
1.12
1.21
1.31
1.41
1.53
1.65
1.78
1.92
2.07
1270
1293
1317
1341
1365
1390
1415
1441
1467
1.27
1.36
1.47
1.58
1.70
1.83
1.96
2.11
2.26
1324
1347
1370
1394
1418
1442
1467
1493
---
1.42
1.52
1.63
1.75
1.87
2.01
2.15
2.30
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ506), motor pulley (part no. KR11HY181) and belt (part no. KR30AE041).
48TC**05
3 Phase
4 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
666
701
737
773
810
847
885
923
962
0.26
0.31
0.36
0.42
0.49
0.57
0.66
0.75
0.85
778
810
842
875
909
943
978
1014
1049
0.37
0.43
0.49
0.57
0.65
0.73
0.83
0.94
1.05
871
901
931
963
994
1027
1060
1093
1127
0.47
0.54
0.62
0.70
0.79
0.89
1.00
1.11
1.24
952
981
0.57
0.65
0.74
0.84
0.94
1.05
1.16
1.29
1.42
1025
1053
1081
1110
1140
1170
1200
1231
1263
0.67
0.76
0.86
0.96
1.08
1.20
1.32
1.46
1.61
1010
1040
1070
1101
1133
1165
1198
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
1093
1119
1147
1175
1204
1233
1262
1293
1323
0.77
0.87
0.98
1.09
1.21
1.34
1.48
1.63
1.79
1155
1181
1208
1235
1263
1292
1321
1350
1380
0.87
0.98
1.09
1.22
1.35
1.49
1.64
1.79
1.96
1213
1239
1265
1292
1320
1348
1376
1405
1434
0.96
1.08
1.21
1.34
1.48
1.63
1.79
1.96
2.13
1268
1294
1320
1346
1373
1401
1428
1457
1486
1.05
1.18
1.32
1.46
1.61
1.77
1.94
2.12
2.31
1321
1346
1371
1397
1424
1451
1479
1506
---
1.14
1.28
1.43
1.58
1.74
1.91
2.09
2.28
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ506), motor pulley (part no. KR11HY181) and belt (part no. KR30AE041).
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**06
1 Phase
5 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
800
849
899
950
1001
1053
1106
1159
---
0.39
0.48
0.59
0.70
0.84
0.99
1.16
1.34
---
904
947
992
1038
1085
1133
1182
1231
---
0.49
0.59
0.70
0.82
0.96
1.12
1.29
1.49
---
999
1038
1078
1120
1163
1208
1254
---
0.60
0.70
0.82
0.95
1.09
1.26
1.44
---
1087
1122
1159
1198
1238
1280
---
0.72
0.83
0.95
1.08
1.23
1.40
---
1169
1201
1235
1271
1309
---
---
---
---
0.85
0.96
1.08
1.22
1.38
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
1247
1276
1308
1342
---
---
---
---
---
0.98
1.10
1.22
1.37
---
---
---
---
---
1320
1348
1377
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.13
1.24
1.38
---
---
---
---
---
---
1390
1416
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.28
1.40
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1457
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.44
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
48TC**06
1 Phase
5 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
848
897
947
997
1048
1100
1152
1205
---
0.42
0.51
0.61
0.72
0.85
1.00
1.16
1.34
---
968
0.55
0.65
0.76
0.89
1.03
1.19
1.36
---
1069
1111
1155
1199
1244
1290
---
0.68
0.79
0.91
1.05
1.20
1.37
---
1158
1198
1240
1283
1326
---
---
---
---
0.80
0.93
1.06
1.21
1.37
---
---
---
---
1238
1277
1318
1359
---
---
---
0.94
1.07
1.21
1.37
---
---
---
1013
1059
1105
1153
1201
1250
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
Medium Static Option
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
1312
1350
1390
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.07
1.21
1.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
1380
1418
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.20
1.35
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1445
1482
1.34
1.50
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1506
1.48
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part number KR11HY171) and belt (part number KR30AE039).
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**06
3 Phase
5 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
800
849
899
0.39
0.48
0.59
0.70
0.84
0.99
1.16
1.34
1.55
904
947
992
1038
1085
1133
1182
1231
1281
0.49
0.59
0.70
0.82
0.96
1.12
1.29
1.49
1.70
999
0.60
0.70
0.82
0.95
1.09
1.26
1.44
1.64
1.86
1087
1122
1159
1198
1238
1280
1323
1367
1412
0.72
0.83
0.95
1.08
1.23
1.40
1.59
1.80
2.02
1169
1201
1235
1271
1309
1348
1389
1430
1473
0.85
0.96
1.08
1.22
1.38
1.55
1.74
1.96
2.19
1038
1078
1120
1163
1208
1254
1300
1348
950
1001
1053
1106
1159
1212
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
1247
1276
1308
1342
1377
1414
1452
1492
1533
0.98
1.10
1.22
1.37
1.53
1.71
1.91
2.12
2.36
1320
1348
1377
1409
1442
1477
1514
1551
1591
1.13
1.24
1.38
1.52
1.69
1.87
2.08
2.30
2.54
1390
1416
1444
1473
1505
1538
1573
1609
1647
1.28
1.40
1.53
1.69
1.86
2.04
2.25
2.48
2.73
1457
1481
1507
1536
1565
1597
1630
1665
---
1.44
1.56
1.70
1.86
2.03
2.22
2.43
2.66
---
1522
1544
1569
1596
1624
1654
1686
1719
---
1.61
1.73
1.87
2.03
2.21
2.40
2.62
2.85
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AZ506), motor pulley (part number KR11HY191) and belt (part number
KR30AE042).
48TC**06
3 Phase
5 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
848
897
947
0.42
0.51
0.61
0.72
0.85
1.00
1.16
1.34
1.54
968
0.55
0.65
0.76
0.89
1.03
1.19
1.36
1.55
1.76
1069
1111
1155
1199
1244
1290
1336
1384
1431
0.68
0.79
0.91
1.05
1.20
1.37
1.55
1.76
1.98
1158
1198
1240
1283
1326
1370
1415
1460
1506
0.80
0.93
1.06
1.21
1.37
1.55
1.75
1.96
2.20
1238
1277
1318
1359
1401
1444
1487
1532
1576
0.94
1.07
1.21
1.37
1.54
1.73
1.94
2.17
2.41
1013
1059
1105
1153
1201
1250
1299
1349
997
1048
1100
1152
1205
1258
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
2125
2250
2375
2500
1312
1350
1390
1430
1471
1513
1555
1598
1642
1.07
1.21
1.36
1.53
1.72
1.92
2.13
2.37
2.63
1380
1418
1457
1496
1536
1577
1619
1661
1704
1.20
1.35
1.51
1.69
1.89
2.10
2.33
2.57
2.84
1445
1482
1520
1559
1598
1638
1679
1720
---
1.34
1.50
1.67
1.86
2.06
2.28
2.52
2.78
---
1506
1542
1580
1618
1657
1696
1736
---
1.48
1.64
1.83
2.02
2.24
2.47
2.72
---
1564
1600
1637
1675
1713
1752
---
1.62
1.79
1.98
2.19
2.41
2.65
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AZ506), motor pulley (part number KR11HY191) and belt (part number
KR30AE042).
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**07
3 Phase
6 Ton Horizontal Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1800
1950
2100
2250
2400
2550
2700
2850
3000
913
972
0.64
0.78
0.95
1.14
1.36
1.60
1.87
2.17
2.50
1010
1065
1120
1177
1234
1293
1352
1412
1472
0.80
0.96
1.14
1.34
1.57
1.82
2.10
2.42
2.76
1098
1148
1200
1254
1308
1363
1420
1477
1535
0.98
1.14
1.33
1.55
1.78
2.05
2.34
2.67
3.03
1178
1226
1275
1325
1377
1430
1484
1539
1595
1.16
1.34
1.54
1.76
2.01
2.28
2.59
2.93
3.29
1252
1298
1345
1393
1443
1494
1546
1599
1653
1.35
1.54
1.75
1.98
2.24
2.53
2.84
3.19
3.57
1032
1093
1155
1217
1280
1343
1406
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1800
1950
2100
2250
2400
2550
2700
2850
3000
1322
1366
1411
1457
1505
1554
1604
1656
---
1.56
1.75
1.97
2.21
2.48
2.78
3.10
3.46
---
1388
1430
1473
1518
1564
1612
1660
---
1.77
1.97
2.20
2.45
2.73
3.03
3.37
---
1451
1491
1533
1576
1621
1667
1715
---
1.98
2.20
2.43
2.69
2.98
3.30
3.64
---
1510
1550
1590
1632
1676
1721
---
2.21
2.43
2.67
2.94
3.24
3.57
---
1568
1606
1645
1686
1729
---
---
---
---
2.44
2.67
2.92
3.20
3.51
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AZ406), motor pulley (part number KR11HY151) and belt (part number
KR29AF035).
48TC**07
3 Phase
6 Ton Vertical Supply
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.4 0.6 0.8
0.2
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
1800
1950
2100
2250
2400
2550
2700
2850
3000
967
0.63
0.77
0.93
1.11
1.32
1.55
1.80
2.09
2.40
1075
1132
1189
1248
1308
1369
1431
1493
1556
0.80
0.96
1.14
1.33
1.55
1.80
2.07
2.37
2.70
1170
1223
1278
1333
1390
1448
1507
1566
1627
0.97
1.14
1.33
1.55
1.78
2.05
2.33
2.65
3.00
1255
1306
1358
1411
1466
1521
1578
1636
1694
1.13
1.32
1.52
1.75
2.01
2.29
2.59
2.92
3.29
1333
1382
1433
1484
1537
1590
1645
1701
1757
1.28
1.49
1.71
1.96
2.23
2.52
2.84
3.19
3.57
1029
1091
1154
1218
1283
1348
1414
1479
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
1800
1950
2100
2250
2400
2550
2700
2850
3000
1406
1454
1502
1552
1603
1655
1709
1763
---
1.43
1.65
1.89
2.15
2.44
2.75
3.09
3.45
---
1475
1521
1568
1617
1666
1717
1769
---
---
1.58
1.82
2.07
2.35
2.65
2.98
3.33
---
---
1540
1585
1631
1678
1727
1776
1827
---
---
1.72
1.98
2.25
2.54
2.86
3.20
3.57
---
---
1601
1645
1690
1737
1784
1833
---
1.87
2.13
2.42
2.73
3.06
3.42
---
1660
1703
1747
1793
1839
1887
---
2.00
2.29
2.59
2.92
3.26
3.64
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part number KR11AZ506), motor pulley (part number KR11HY191) and belt (part number
KR29AF042).
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
48TC**08
3 PHASE
7.5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
2250
2438
2625
2813
3000
3188
3375
3563
3750
505
533
562
591
621
652
682
713
745
0.52
0.62
0.74
0.88
1.03
1.21
1.40
1.61
1.85
586
610
635
661
688
715
743
772
801
0.73
0.85
0.98
1.13
1.29
1.48
1.68
1.91
2.15
657
679
701
725
749
774
800
826
853
0.97
1.09
1.23
1.39
1.57
1.77
1.98
2.22
2.48
722
742
762
783
806
829
853
878
903
1.22
1.36
1.51
1.68
1.87
2.07
2.30
2.55
2.82
782
800
819
839
859
881
903
927
951
1.50
1.65
1.81
1.98
2.18
2.40
2.63
2.89
3.18
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
2250
2438
2625
2813
3000
3188
3375
3563
3750
838
854
872
890
910
930
951
973
996
1.81
1.96
2.12
2.31
2.51
2.74
2.99
3.26
3.55
891
906
922
940
958
977
997
1018
1040
2.12
2.28
2.46
2.65
2.86
3.10
3.35
3.63
3.93
941
955
970
2.46
2.63
2.81
3.01
3.23
3.47
3.74
4.02
4.34
988
2.82
2.99
3.17
3.38
3.61
3.86
4.13
4.43
4.75
1033
1046
1060
1074
1090
1107
1124
1143
1162
3.19
3.37
3.56
3.77
4.01
4.26
4.54
4.85
5.18
1001
1016
1031
1048
1065
1083
1103
1122
986
1004
1022
1041
1061
1082
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ002) and belt (part no. KR29AF054).
48TC**08
3 PHASE
7.5 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
2250
2438
2625
2813
3000
3188
3375
3563
3750
513
541
570
600
629
660
690
721
752
0.54
0.65
0.77
0.91
1.07
1.25
1.45
1.67
1.91
595
620
645
672
699
726
754
783
812
0.76
0.89
1.02
1.18
1.35
1.54
1.75
1.98
2.24
665
688
712
736
761
787
813
840
867
1.01
1.14
1.29
1.46
1.64
1.85
2.07
2.32
2.59
728
750
772
794
818
842
867
892
918
1.27
1.42
1.58
1.76
1.95
2.17
2.41
2.67
2.95
786
806
827
848
871
894
917
941
966
1.56
1.71
1.88
2.07
2.28
2.51
2.76
3.03
3.32
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
2250
2438
2625
2813
3000
3188
3375
3563
3750
839
858
878
899
920
942
964
988
1011
1.86
2.02
2.20
2.40
2.62
2.86
3.12
3.41
3.71
889
907
926
946
966
987
1009
1032
1054
2.18
2.35
2.54
2.75
2.98
3.23
3.50
3.80
4.11
935
953
972
2.52
2.70
2.89
3.11
3.35
3.61
3.89
4.20
4.53
980
997
2.87
3.06
3.26
3.49
3.74
4.01
4.30
4.61
4.95
1022
1039
1056
1074
1093
1112
1132
1152
---
3.23
3.43
3.64
3.88
4.14
4.42
4.72
5.04
---
1015
1033
1052
1072
1093
1114
1135
991
1010
1031
1052
1074
1096
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ002) and belt (part no. KR29AF054).
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
8.5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
48TC**09
3 PHASE
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
2550
2763
2975
3188
3400
3613
3825
4038
4250
497
524
551
580
609
638
668
698
728
0.48
0.58
0.70
0.84
1.00
1.17
1.37
1.59
1.83
579
602
626
651
677
703
730
758
786
0.61
0.72
0.86
1.00
1.17
1.35
1.56
1.79
2.04
651
671
693
716
739
763
788
813
839
0.75
0.87
1.01
1.17
1.35
1.54
1.76
2.00
2.26
717
735
754
775
797
819
842
866
890
0.90
1.03
1.18
1.34
1.53
1.73
1.96
2.20
2.47
777
794
812
831
851
871
893
915
938
1.05
1.19
1.35
1.52
1.71
1.93
2.16
2.42
2.70
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
2550
2763
2975
3188
3400
3613
3825
4038
4250
833
849
865
883
902
921
941
963
984
1.21
1.36
1.52
1.70
1.90
2.13
2.37
2.63
2.92
886
900
916
933
950
969
988
1008
1029
1.38
1.53
1.70
1.89
2.10
2.33
2.58
2.86
3.15
936
950
964
980
996
1014
1032
1051
1071
1.56
1.72
1.89
2.09
2.30
2.54
2.80
3.08
3.39
984
996
1.74
1.90
2.09
2.29
2.51
2.76
3.02
3.31
3.63
1029
1041
1054
1068
1083
1099
1116
1133
1152
1.93
2.10
2.29
2.50
2.73
2.98
3.25
3.55
3.87
1010
1025
1041
1057
1075
1093
1112
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AK012) and belt (part no. KR29AF055).
2. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part no. KR11HY310), fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ002) and belt (part no. KR29AF054).
48TC**09
3 PHASE
8.5 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
2550
2763
2975
3188
3400
3613
3825
4038
4250
526
557
588
621
653
687
720
754
788
0.51
0.62
0.75
0.90
1.06
1.25
1.45
1.69
1.94
600
627
655
684
714
744
775
807
839
0.65
0.77
0.91
1.07
1.25
1.45
1.67
1.91
2.17
666
690
716
743
770
798
827
856
886
0.79
0.92
1.08
1.25
1.44
1.65
1.88
2.13
2.41
727
749
772
797
822
849
876
904
932
0.93
1.08
1.24
1.42
1.62
1.84
2.09
2.35
2.64
783
804
825
848
872
897
922
949
976
1.07
1.23
1.40
1.60
1.81
2.04
2.30
2.57
2.88
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
2550
2763
2975
3188
3400
3613
3825
4038
4250
836
855
875
897
919
943
967
992
1018
1.20
1.37
1.56
1.77
1.99
2.24
2.51
2.80
3.11
886
904
923
943
964
986
1010
1034
1058
1.34
1.52
1.72
1.94
2.18
2.44
2.71
3.02
3.34
934
950
968
1.48
1.67
1.88
2.11
2.36
2.63
2.92
3.24
3.57
979
995
1.61
1.82
2.04
2.29
2.55
2.83
3.13
3.46
---
1022
1037
1053
1071
1089
1108
1129
1150
---
1.74
1.97
2.20
2.46
2.73
3.02
3.34
3.68
---
1012
1030
1049
1069
1090
1112
---
987
1007
1029
1051
1074
1097
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part no. KR11HY310), fan pulley (part no. KR11AZ002) and belt (part no. KR29AF054).
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
10 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
48TC**12
3 PHASE
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
1
F i e l d --- S u p p l i e d D r i v e
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
4250
4500
4750
5000
579
613
648
683
719
756
792
830
867
0.70
0.85
1.03
1.23
1.45
1.71
1.99
2.31
2.66
660
690
721
753
786
819
853
888
923
0.89
1.06
1.25
1.47
1.71
1.98
2.28
2.62
2.98
732
760
788
817
848
879
910
943
976
1.09
1.27
1.48
1.71
1.97
2.26
2.57
2.92
3.30
799
823
850
877
905
934
964
995
1026
1.29
1.49
1.71
1.96
2.23
2.53
2.87
3.23
3.63
860
883
907
933
959
1.50
1.71
1.95
2.21
2.50
2.81
3.16
3.54
3.95
987
1015
1044
1074
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
4250
4500
4750
5000
917
938
961
1.70
1.93
2.18
2.46
2.76
3.09
3.46
3.85
4.28
970
991
1.91
2.16
2.42
2.71
3.03
3.38
3.76
4.16
4.61
1021
1041
1062
1083
1106
1130
1155
1180
1207
2.13
2.38
2.66
2.97
3.30
3.66
4.06
4.48
4.94
1070
1089
1108
1129
1151
1174
1198
1222
---
2.34
2.61
2.91
3.23
3.58
3.95
4.36
4.80
---
1117
1134
1153
1173
1194
1216
1239
1263
---
2.56
2.85
3.15
3.49
3.85
4.24
4.66
5.12
---
1013
1035
1059
1084
1110
1137
1164
985
1011
1037
1064
1091
1120
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AD912) and belt (part no. KR29AF051).
2. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part no. KR11HY410).
48TC**12
3 PHASE
10 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Standard Static Option
Medium Static Option
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
4250
4500
4750
5000
616
655
695
736
777
818
860
902
944
0.79
0.96
1.17
1.41
1.68
1.98
2.32
2.69
3.11
689
724
760
797
834
873
912
951
991
0.97
1.16
1.38
1.63
1.91
2.23
2.58
2.97
3.40
757
788
821
855
889
925
962
999
1037
1.16
1.37
1.60
1.86
2.16
2.49
2.85
3.26
3.70
821
849
879
910
942
1.36
1.58
1.83
2.10
2.41
2.75
3.13
3.55
4.00
882
907
934
963
1.57
1.80
2.06
2.35
2.67
3.02
3.41
3.84
4.31
993
976
1025
1057
1091
1125
1010
1046
1082
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4 1.6 1.8
1.2
2.0
CFM
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
RPM
BHP
Medium Static Option
High Static Option
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
4250
4500
4750
5000
939
962
987
1014
1042
1072
1103
1135
1167
1.79
2.03
2.30
2.60
2.93
3.30
3.70
4.14
4.63
994
2.01
2.26
2.54
2.86
3.20
3.58
4.00
4.45
4.95
1047
1066
1088
1111
1136
1162
1190
1219
---
2.24
2.50
2.80
3.12
3.48
3.87
4.29
4.76
---
1098
1115
1135
1157
1180
1205
1232
1259
---
2.47
2.75
3.05
3.39
3.76
4.16
4.60
5.08
---
1147
1163
1181
1202
1224
1247
1273
---
2.71
3.00
3.32
3.66
4.04
4.46
4.91
---
1015
1038
1063
1090
1118
1147
1177
1209
---
---
NOTE: For more information, see General Fan Performance Notes on page 87.
Boldface indicates field---supplied drive is required.
1. Recommend using field---supplied motor pulley (part no. KR11HY410).
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Pulley Adjustment
MOTOR PULLEY TURNS OPEN
MOTOR/DRIVE
UNIT
COMBO
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
Standard Static
854
825
795
766
736
707
678
648
619
589
560
Medium Static
High Static
1175
---
1135
---
1094
---
1054
---
1013
---
973
---
932
---
892
---
851
---
811
---
770
---
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
854
825
795
766
736
707
973
1251
707
973
---
678
932
1207
678
932
---
648
892
1164
648
892
---
619
851
1121
619
851
---
589
811
1078
589
811
---
560
770
1035
560
770
---
1175
1466
854
1135
1423
825
1094
1380
795
1054
1337
766
1013
1294
736
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
1175
---
1135
---
1094
---
1054
---
1013
---
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
854
825
795
766
736
707
973
1251
973
1251
---
678
932
1207
932
1207
---
648
892
1164
892
1164
---
619
851
1121
851
1121
---
589
811
1078
811
1078
---
560
770
1035
770
1035
---
1175
1466
1175
1466
---
1135
1423
1135
1423
---
1094
1380
1094
1380
---
1054
1337
1054
1337
---
1013
1294
1013
1294
---
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
1175
1466
1687
1457
1518
1788
747
1135
1423
1649
1419
1484
1757
721
1094
1380
1610
1380
1449
1725
695
1054
1337
1572
1342
1415
1694
670
1013
1294
1533
1303
1380
1662
644
973
1251
1495
1265
1346
1631
618
841
1006
626
813
961
715
961
1131
932
1207
1457
1227
1311
1600
592
819
986
604
788
936
690
936
1109
892
1164
1418
1188
1277
1568
566
798
967
583
764
912
665
912
1087
851
1121
1380
1150
1242
1537
541
776
948
561
739
887
640
887
1066
811
1078
1341
1111
1208
1505
515
755
928
540
715
863
616
863
1044
770
1035
1303
1073
1173
1474
489
733
909
518
690
838
591
838
1022
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
949
927
906
884
863
1102
733
1083
712
1063
690
1044
669
1025
647
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
936
911
887
862
838
1084
838
1059
813
1035
789
1010
764
986
Standard Static
Medium Static
High Static
739
1084
1240
1059
1218
1035
1196
1010
1175
986
1153
NOTE: Do not adjust pulley further than 5 turns open.
--- Fa ct o r y se t t in g s
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA
48TC**04
3 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
IFM
Max
AMP Draw
5.1
V --- P h --- H z
Max
WATTS
325
FLA
1.5
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
WATTS
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
2120
1000
1000
2120
1000
2120
2120
1000
2120
2120
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
70%
70%
70%
70%
70%
70%
80%
70%
70%
80%
70%
80%
80%
71%
80%
80%
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.9
5.2
4.9
4.9
5.2
2.1
2.6
2.6
1.9
2.0
2.0
2 0 8 --- 1 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 1 --- 6 0
187
187
253
16.6
16.6
79
79
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.5
5.1
5.1
5.5
2.2
2.7
2.7
2.0
2.1
2.1
253
253
325
1.5
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
10.4
10.4
5.8
73
73
38
37
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
48TC**05
V --- P h --- H z
633
3.8
4 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
IFM
Max
AMP Draw
5.1
Max
WATTS
1000
1850
1000
1850
1000
1000
2120
1000
1000
2120
1000
2120
2120
1000
2120
2120
WATTS
325
FLA
1.5
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
70%
78%
70%
78%
70%
70%
80%
70%
70%
80%
70%
80%
80%
71%
80%
80%
4.9
7.0
4.9
7.0
4.9
4.9
5.2
4.9
4.9
5.2
2.1
2.6
2.6
1.9
2.0
2.0
2 0 8 --- 1 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 1 --- 6 0
187
187
253
21.8
21.8
117
117
7.4
5.1
7.4
5.1
5.1
5.5
5.1
5.1
5.5
2.2
2.7
2.7
2.0
2.1
2.1
253
253
325
1.5
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
13.7
13.7
6.2
83
83
41
37
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
633
4.8
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)
48TC**06
5 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
WATTS FLA
IFM
V --- P h --- H z
Max
WATTS
1000
1850
1000
1850
1000
2120
2615
1000
2120
2615
2120
2615
2615
2120
3775
3775
Max
AMP Draw
5.1
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
70%
78%
70%
78%
70%
80%
81%
70%
80%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
4.9
7.0
4.9
7.0
4.9
5.2
7.5
4.9
5.2
7.5
2.6
3.4
3.4
2.0
2.8
2.8
2 0 8 --- 1 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 1 --- 6 0
187
187
253
26.2
26.2
134
134
325
325
1.5
1.5
7.4
5.1
7.4
5.1
5.5
7.9
5.1
5.5
7.9
2.7
3.6
3.6
2.1
2.9
2.9
253
253
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
15.6
15.6
7.7
110
110
52
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
48TC**07
V --- P h --- H z
633
5.8
39
6 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
WATTS FLA
IFM
Max
AMP Draw
5.5
Max
WATTS
2120
2615
3775
2120
2615
3775
2120
2615
3775
2120
3775
3775
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
5.2
7.5
10.2
5.2
7.5
10.2
2.6
3.4
4.8
2.0
2.8
2.8
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
253
19.0
19.0
9.7
12
12
62
50
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
7.9
10.7
5.5
7.9
10.7
2.7
3.6
5.0
2.1
2.9
253
506
633
7.4
2.9
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)
48TC**08
7.5 TONS
COMP (ea)
OFM (ea)
WATTS FLA
IFM
VOLTAGE
RANGE
EFF at
Full
Load
V --- P h --- H z
Max
WATTS
Max
AMP Draw
RLA LRA
TYPE
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
1448
2278
4559
1448
2278
4559
1448
2278
4559
1379
3775
1870
5.5
7.9
15.8
5.5
7.9
15.8
2.7
3.6
7.8
2.5
2.9
5.9
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
5.2
7.5
15.0
5.2
7.5
15.0
2.6
3.4
7.4
2.4
2.8
5.6
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
253
25.0
25.0
12.2
9.0
164
164
100
78
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
633
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
48TC**09
V --- P h --- H z
8.5 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
WATTS FLA
IFM
Max
WATTS
Max
AMP Draw
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
1448
2120
2694
1448
2120
2694
1448
2120
2694
1379
1390
3775
5.5
5.5
10.5
5.5
5.5
10.5
2.7
2.7
4.6
2.5
2.1
2.9
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
80%
81%
5.2
5.2
10.0
5.2
5.2
10.0
2.6
2.6
4.4
2.4
2.0
2.8
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
253
29.5
29.5
14.7
12.2
195
195
95
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
633
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
48TC**12
V --- P h --- H z
80
10 TONS
VOLTAGE
RANGE
COMP (ea)
RLA LRA
OFM (ea)
WATTS FLA
IFM
Max
WATTS
Max
AMP Draw
TYPE
EFF at Full Load
FLA
MIN
MAX
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
Std Static
Med Static
High Static
2120
3775
4559
2120
3775
4559
2120
3775
4559
1390
3775
1870
5.5
10.5
15.8
5.5
10.5
15.8
2.7
4.6
7.8
2.1
2.9
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
80%
81%
81%
5.2
10.0
15.0
5.2
10.0
15.0
2.6
4.4
7.4
2.0
2.8
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
187
187
414
518
253
30.1
30.1
16.7
12.2
225
225
114
80
325
325
325
325
1.5
1.5
0.8
0.6
253
506
633
5.9
5.6
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)
MCA/MOCP DETERMINATION NO C.O. OR UNPWRD C.O.
NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
COMBUSTION POWER
FAN MOTOR EXHAUST
NO P.E.
DISC. SIZE
FLA LRA
26 95
w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)
NOM.
V --- P h --- H z
IFM
TYPE
DISC. SIZE
FLA
FLA
MCA
MOCP
MCA
MOCP
FLA
29
29
22
22
22
11
11
12
9
LRA
97
97
91
91
109
47
47
56
46
STD
MED
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
27.2
27.2
19.4
19.4
19.7
10.2
10.2
10.7
7.3
40.0
40.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
50.0
50.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
60.0
60.0
30.0
40.0
40.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
45.0
50.0
50.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
15.0
20.0
20.0
29.1
29.1
21.3
21.3
21.6
11.2
11.2
11.7
9.2
45.0
45.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
50.0
50.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
60.0
60.0
40.0
40.0
45.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
0.48
1.9
26
19
19
20
10
10
11
7
95
89
89
107
46
46
0.48
0.25
1.9
1.0
MED
HIGH
STD
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
55
44
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
7.3
7.4
7
7
44
9.2
9
46
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
0.24
0.48
0.48
1.9
1.9
1.9
50
9.3
10
35
35
25
25
25
12
12
12
11
11
11
40
42
27
28
30
13
14
15
12
13
13
32
34
34
16
17
18
14
15
15
52
33.7
33.7
23.5
23.5
23.8
10.7
10.7
11.2
8.5
32
32
23
23
23
10
10
11
8
133
133
99
99
117
49
49
58
44
44
35.6
35.6
25.4
25.4
25.7
11.7
11.7
12.2
10.4
10.4
10.5
41.1
43.2
27.8
28.1
30.4
13.5
14.0
14.8
11.7
11.8
12.6
32.4
34.7
34.7
16.5
17.3
18.3
13.8
14.6
14.6
135
135
101
101
119
50
50
59
46
46
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
MED
HIGH
STD
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
0.25
1.0
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
8.5
8.6
8
9
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
0.24
0.48
0.48
1.9
1.9
1.9
50
52
39.2
41.3
25.9
26.2
28.5
12.5
13.0
13.8
9.8
37
40
25
26
29
12
13
14
10
10
11
30
32
32
15
16
17
12
12
12
150
175
126
144
170
60
69
82
46
52
152
177
128
146
172
61
70
83
48
54
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
0.25
0.24
0.48
0.25
0.24
1.0
1.9
1.9
1.0
1.9
9.9
10.7
30.5
32.8
32.8
15.5
16.3
17.3
11.9
12.7
12.7
63
65
157
183
183
79
92
101
63
159
185
185
80
93
102
65
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
208/230---3---60
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
MED
HIGH
74
74
76
76
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
See notes on next page.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)
MCA/MOCP DETERMINATION NO C.O. OR UNPWRD C.O.
NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)
DISC. SIZE
COMBUSTION
FAN MOTOR
FLA
POWER
EXHAUST
FLA
NO P.E.
NOM.
V --- P h --- H z
IFM
TYPE
DISC. SIZE
MCA
MOCP
MCA
MOCP
FLA
38
41
49
19
20
24
14
15
18
43
43
49
22
22
24
18
18
19
44
50
55
24
26
30
18
19
22
LRA
191
228
254
113
132
145
89
104
118
222
233
276
108
114
136
91
FLA
43
45
54
21
22
26
19
19
23
48
48
53
24
24
26
23
22
23
48
54
60
26
28
32
22
23
26
LRA
195
232
258
115
134
147
93
108
122
226
237
280
110
116
138
95
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
39.5
41.8
49.3
19.5
20.3
24.3
14.9
15.3
18.1
45.1
45.1
49.9
22.6
22.6
24.4
18.9
18.5
19.3
45.8
50.6
55.6
25.1
26.9
29.9
18.5
19.3
22.1
60
60
60
30
30
30
20
20
25
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
60
80
30
40
45
30
30
30
43.3
45.6
53.1
21.3
22.1
26.1
18.7
19.1
21.9
48.9
48.9
53.7
24.4
24.4
26.2
22.7
22.3
23.1
49.6
54.4
59.4
26.9
28.7
31.7
22.3
23.1
25.9
60
60
60
30
30
30
25
25
30
60
60
80
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
80
80
40
45
45
30
30
30
208/230---3---60
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
0.48
0.25
0.24
0.48
0.25
0.24
0.48
0.25
0.24
3.8
1.8
3.8
3.8
1.8
3.8
3.8
1.8
3.8
MED
HIGH
STD
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
208/230---3---60
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
MED
HIGH
STD
95
99
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
106
263
306
315
133
155
159
95
110
267
310
319
135
157
161
99
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
208/230---3---60
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
MED
HIGH
106
120
110
124
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
1
Example: Supply voltage is 230-3-60
Fuse or breaker
LEGEND:
CO
DISC
FLA
IFM
LRA
MCA
MOCP
P E
AB = 224 v
BC = 231 v
AC = 226 v
--- Convenient outlet
--- Disconnect
--- Full load amps
--- Indoor fan motor
--- Locked rotor amps
--- Minimum circuit amps
--- Maximum over current protection
--- Po w e r e x h a u st
(224 + 231 + 226)
681
3
Average Voltage =
3
=
UNPWRD CO --- Unpowered convenient outlet
NOTES:
=
227
Determine maximum deviation from average voltage.
(AB) 227 – 224 = 3 v
(BC) 231 – 227 = 4 v
(AC) 227 – 226 = 1 v
Maximum deviation is 4 v.
1. In compliance with NEC requirements for multimotor and
combination load equipment (refer to NEC Articles 430 and
440), the overcurrent protective device for the unit shall be
fuse or HACR breaker. Canadian units may be fuse or circuit
breaker.
2. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage
Determine percent of voltage imbalance.
Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance in supply
voltage is greater than 2%. Use the following formula to de-
termine the percentage of voltage imbalance.
4
% Voltage Imbalance
= 100 x
= 1.76%
227
max voltage deviation from average voltage
This amount of phase imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the
maximum allowable 2%.
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
average voltage
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than
2%, contact your local electric utility company immediately.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX V. WIRING DIAGRAM LIST
Wiring Diagrams
48TC_A
SIZE
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
POWER
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500213.04
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500929.05
48TM500984.03
48TM500988.04
48TM500749.07
48TM500748.06
48TM500748.06
48TM500215.06
48TM500749.07
48TM500748.06
48TM500748.06
48TM500215.06
48TM500749.07
48TM500748.06
48TM500748.06
48TM500215.06
48TM500748.06
48TM500748.06
48TM500215.06
48TM500803.05
48TM500803.05
48TM500804.05
48TM500803.05
48TM500803.05
48TM500804.05
48TM500803.05
48TM500803.05
48TM500804.05
A04
A05
A06
575---3---60
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
208/230---1---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
208/230---3---60
460---3---60
575---3---60
PremierLink*
RTU---MP*
A07
A08
A09
A12
All
All
NOTE: Component arrangement on Control; Legend on Power Schematic
*
PremierLink and RTU---MP control labels overlay a portion of the base unit control label. The base unit label drawing and the control option
drawing are required to provide a complete unit control diagram.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX VI. MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS
C08259
C08261
Fig. 85 - 48TC*A04 Outdoor Circuiting
Fig. 87 - 48TC*A07 Outdoor Circuiting
C08260
C08262
Fig. 86 - 48TC*A05/06 Outdoor Circuiting
Fig. 88 - 48TC*A08 Outdoor Circuiting
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX VI. (cont.) MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS
C08263
Fig. 89 - 48TC*A09/12 Outdoor Circuiting
Catalog No: 48TC---2SM
Copyright 2008 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231
Printed in U.S.A.
Edition Date: 08/08
Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.
Replaces: 48TC---1SM
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST
I. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION:
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO: _____________________________________
TECHNICIAN: ___________________________________
BUILDING LOCATION:____________________________
DATE:
______________
II. PRE-START-UP (insert check mark in box as each item is completed):
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
VERIFY THAT ALL PACKAGING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM UNIT
VERIFY THAT CONDENSATE CONNECTION IS INSTALLED PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
VERIFY THAT FLUE HOOD IS INSTALLED
CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND TERMINALS FOR TIGHTNESS
CHECK TO ENSURE NO WIRES ARE TOUCHING REFRIGERANT TUBING OR SHARP EDGES
CHECK GAS PIPING FOR LEAKS
CHECK THAT RETURN--AIR FILTER IS CLEAN AND IN PLACE
VERIFY THAT UNIT INSTALLATION IS LEVEL
CHECK FAN WHEEL AND PROPELLER FOR LOCATION IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND VERIFY SETSCREW IS TIGHT
VERIFY PULLEY ALIGNMENT AND BELT TENSION ARE CORRECT
III. START-UP
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
COMPRESSOR AMPS
INDOOR FAN AMPS
L1-L2
L1
L2-L3
L2
L3-L1
L2
L1
L2
L2
TEMPERATURES
OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE
RETURN-AIR TEMPERATURE
COOLING SUPPLY AIR
DB
DB
DB
DB
WB
WB
WB
GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR
PRESSURES
GAS INLET PRESSURE
IN. WG
GAS MANIFOLD PRESSURE
REFRIGERANT SUCTION
REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE
IN. WG (LOW FIRE)
IN. WG (HI FIRE)
TEMP _F
PSIG
PSIG
TEMP _F
j
j
VERIFY REFRIGERANT CHARGE USING CHARGING CHARTS
VERIFY THAT 3--PHASE SCROLL COMPRESSOR IS ROTATING IN CORRECT DIRECTION
Catalog No: 48TC---2SM
Copyright 2008 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231
Printed in U.S.A.
Edition Date: 08/08
Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.
Replaces: 48TC---1SM
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|